fanuc open cnc - jamet inc · fanuc basic operation package 2 microsoft .net framework 1.1...

378
FANUC OPEN CNC BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63924EN/01

Upload: dinhdiep

Post on 09-Apr-2018

223 views

Category:

Documents


5 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

FANUC OPEN CNC

BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B-63924EN/01

Page 2: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.

Page 3: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being

injured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary

information other than Warning and Caution. - Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

Page 4: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63924EN/01

s-2

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS The warning and caution below provide the precautions related to the use of a CNC. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC. WARNING

1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting the machine, ensure that the settings are correctly made, including the program values, compensation, current position, and external signals. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted.

3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may come under unexpected load, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change. Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

Page 5: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-3

CAUTION

NC programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted by malfunction, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery. To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.

NOTE 1 The operator's manual for Basic Operation Package 2

describes all the basic functions of the CNC, including the optional functions. The selected optional functions vary with the machine. Some functions described in the manual may not, therefore, be supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications before using Basic Operation Package 2.

2 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.For example: • On some machines, executing a tool function

causes the tool change unit to operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator.

• Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function.

Page 6: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63924EN/01

s-4

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATING TO BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2

Warnings and cautions relating to Basic Operation Package 2 are explained in this manual. Before using the product, read this manual thoroughly to become familiar with the provided Warning, Caution, and Note. Also read the note below before attempting to use the product.

NOTE • This manual does not explain in detail those

operations and parameters that vary from one CNC model to another and which vary with options. For an explanation of such operations and parameters, refer to the relevant CNC manual and the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

• This manual describes as many reasonable variations in equipment usage as possible. It cannot address every combination of features, options, and commands that should not be attempted. If a particular combination of operations is not described, it should not be attempted.

Page 7: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 PREFACE

p-1

PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the FANUC Basic Operation Package 2. Basic Operation Package 2 is software that allows the user to perform basic CNC and PMC operations in an Open CNC Microsoft® Windows® environment. Read this manual thoroughly to ensure the correct use of Basic Operation Package 2. The manual does not describe Windows basic operations. When the user is not famililar with Windows, read the Windows manual first to learn Windows basic operations.

NOTE The purchased software product can be copied

within the plant, as required. The machine tool builder should ship machines together with a backup copy of the software product.

FANUC holds the copyright on this software product. Redistributing the entire software product, or part of it, to a third party to develop an application is not allowed.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Windows 2000, Windows XP, ActiveX, OLE, .NET Framework, and .NET Framework SDK are trade marks of Microsoft Corporation.

Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

Page 8: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

PREFACE B-63924EN/01

p-2

BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FEATURES AND RESTRICTIONS Basic Operation Package 2 has the following features: Features • Basic CNC and PMC operations under Windows provide a more

user-friendly operating environment. • A maximum of 10 CNCs can be connected and the operation and

display of each CNC can be performed with easy switching. • The NC program can be transferred at high speed from the hard

disk drive of a personal computer (DNC operation). • One of two operation methods can be selected according to the

user (field machine operator or administrator). • The operation method and display screen can be customized by

definition files in text format.

Page 9: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 PREFACE

p-3

The following restrictions are imposed on Basic Operation Package 2. Restrictions • This software cannot be used with the MMC-IV, a personal

computer connected over HSSB Type 1 or Type 2, and Intelligent Terminal Type 1 or Type 2.

• This software supports the following CNCs:

- The following CNC connected to the PANEL i over HSSB3 or Ethernet. FS300i

- The following CNC connected to a commercial personal computer over HSSB3 or Ethernet. FS30i

• This software cannot be used to develop or debug ladder

programs. • This software does not support DNC operation over an Ethernet

connection.

Page 10: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

PREFACE B-63924EN/01

p-4

CONTENTS OF THE PRODUCT PACKAGE This product package includes the following: • CD-R FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

Page 11: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 PREFACE

p-5

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL Basic Operation Package 2 can be used as a standard interface provided by FANUC for an Open CNC environment as well as a base with which the user starts customization. Therefore, this manual includes operation sections and customization sections. See operation sections for basic operations of the CNC and PCM or see customization sections when the user wants to use his or her own screens or operations by changing standard operations.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Explains the general precautions which must be observed to

ensure safety when using Basic Operation Package 2. PREFACE Briefly explains the features of Basic Operation Package 2.

Also explains how to use information on the usage of Basic Operation Package 2, including this manual.

SETUP 1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Explains an environment required for the operation of Basic Operation Package 2.

2 INSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 Explains how to install Basic Operation Package 2.

3 UNINSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 Explains how to uninstall Basic Operation Package 2.

4 PROCEDURE AT INITIAL STARTUP Explains the procedures for display language selection and CNC connection settings required when Basic Operation Package 2 is first started up.

5 SETTING THE CNC PARAMETERS Explains settings of the minimum CNC parameters required to operate Basic Operation Package 2.

Page 12: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

PREFACE B-63924EN/01

p-6

STANDARD OPERATION 1 SCREEN LAYOUT AND COMMON ITEMS

Explains the standard screen layout of Basic Operation Package 2 and the display and operation methods common to all screens.

2 POSITION DISPLAY Explains how to display the current or other positions of the

CNC. 3 NC PROGRAM Explains how to display, edit, and confirm the NC program

stored in the CNC. 4 SETTING Explains how to make various CNC settings. 5 SYSTEM Explains how to display or set information on the CNC system

and how to input or output various data. 6 MESSAGES Explains how to display CNC alarm messages or other messages. 7 CONFIGURATION Explains how to change the language selection and operational

settings of Basic Operation Package 2. CUSTOMIZATION 1 OVERVIEW OF CUSTOMIZATION

Provides an overview of customization of Basic Operation Package 2.

2 CUSTOMIZATION FILES Explains definition files for customization.

3 BASIC CUSTOMIZATION Explains how to customize the appearance of Basic Operation Package 2.

4 OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION Explains how to customize the operation system of Basic Operation Package 2.

5 CUSTOMIZING CHILD SCREENS Explains how to customize the appearance and displayed information of each child screen.

6 CUSTOMIZING THE STATUS BAR Explains how to customize the status bar.

7 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE DISPLAY AREA Explains how to customize alarm messages and operator messages.

8 CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA Explains how to customize the PMC status.

9 CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION Explains how to customize DNC operation.

Page 13: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 PREFACE

p-7

APPENDIX APPENDIX A SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

Explains the CNC settings (options, parameters, and modes) about each screen of Basic Operation Package 2.

APPENDIX B CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES Explains how to change the message strings displayed on Basic Operation Package 2 screens.

Page 14: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

PREFACE B-63924EN/01

p-8

NOTATION CONVENTIONS The following explains the notation conventions used in this manual: • Menu, command, and screen notations

Example Explanation [File] menu Menu names are enclosed in brackets [ ]. [Setting...] Command names are enclosed in brackets

[ ]. [Program Edit] screen Screen names (displayed on the title bars)

are enclosed in brackets [ ]. <OK> button Command buttons on the display are

enclosed in angle brackets < >. • Key notations and operation

Example Explanation [Enter] key Key names are enclosed in brackets [ ]. [Ctrl]+[Tab] keys When keys are to be pressed and held down

sequentially, the keys are indicated by connecting them with +, as shown on the left.

Direction keys The [→], [←], [↑], and [↓] keys are collectively called the direction keys.

• Mouse operations

Example Explanation Click Press a mouse button, then release it immediately. Double-click Click a mouse button twice in quick succession. Drag Move the mouse while holding down a mouse

button, then release the button at a desired location. • Folders

This manual refers to directories and folders collectively as folders.

• Sample screens The screens shown in this manual are examples of the standard system supplied by FANUC. Note that the screen layouts and displayed file names may vary with the equipment being used and according to customization. Soft keys or screens are not displayed if the equipment being used does not support the corresponding functions (for example, some functions are supported only by machining center systems) or if the CNC options for the corresponding functions are not installed. Soft keys or screens are not displayed if the equipment being used does not support the corresponding functions (for example, some functions are supported only by machining center systems) or if the CNC options for the corresponding functions are not installed.

• CNC units

Unless otherwise specified, CNC refers to the FS30i/31i/32i, while FS30i refers to the FS30i/31i/32i.

Page 15: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 PREFACE....................................................................................................p-1 1 SETUP.....................................................................................................1

1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 2 1.2 INSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2........................................... 3 1.3 UNINSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2...................................... 9 1.4 PROCEDURE AT INITIAL STARTUP ......................................................... 12 1.5 SETTING THE CNC PARAMETERS........................................................... 13

2 STANDARD OPERATION ....................................................................15 2.1 SCREEN LAYOUT AND COMMON ITEMS ................................................ 16

2.1.1 Configuration of the Standard Screen ....................................................................16 2.1.2 Key Controls and Screen Transition ......................................................................19 2.1.3 Display of Messages from Connected CNCs .........................................................33 2.1.4 Monitoring the Power State of Connected CNCs...................................................35

2.2 POSITION DISPLAY ................................................................................... 37 2.2.1 Overall Position Display ........................................................................................37 2.2.2 Displaying the Absolute Position ...........................................................................38 2.2.3 Displaying the Relative Position ............................................................................39

2.2.3.1 Resetting relative coordinates .............................................................................................................. 40 2.2.3.2 Presetting relative coordinates ............................................................................................................. 42 2.2.3.3 Setting the machine position to the floating reference position .......................................................... 44 2.2.3.4 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system........................................................................................ 46

2.2.4 Displaying the Machine Position ...........................................................................48 2.2.5 Displaying the Distance to Go................................................................................49

2.3 NC PROGRAM............................................................................................ 50 2.3.1 Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed...........................................50

2.3.1.1 Searching for an NC program .............................................................................................................. 51 2.3.1.2 Searching for a sequence number ........................................................................................................ 52

2.3.2 Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of the NC Program Being Executed ......53 2.3.3 Displaying the NC Program Directory ...................................................................54

2.3.3.1 Switching the NC program directory display ...................................................................................... 55 2.3.3.2 Selecting an NC program to be executed............................................................................................. 57 2.3.3.3 Creating an NC program ...................................................................................................................... 58 2.3.3.4 Deleting an NC program ...................................................................................................................... 59 2.3.3.5 Renaming an NC program.................................................................................................................... 60 2.3.3.6 Copying an NC program ...................................................................................................................... 61 2.3.3.7 Moving an NC program ....................................................................................................................... 63 2.3.3.8 Setting the attribute of an NC program................................................................................................ 65 2.3.3.9 Setting the protect level of an NC program ......................................................................................... 67 2.3.3.10 Condensing an NC program................................................................................................................. 69 2.3.3.11 Creating a folder on the CNC .............................................................................................................. 70

Page 16: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63924EN/01

c-2

2.3.3.12 Deleting a folder from the CNC........................................................................................................... 72 2.3.3.13 Renaming a folder on the CNC............................................................................................................ 73 2.3.3.14 Setting the attribute of a folder on the CNC ........................................................................................ 74

2.3.4 Editing an NC Program ..........................................................................................75 2.3.4.1 Writing an NC program back to the CNC............................................................................................ 77 2.3.4.2 Inserting an NC program from a disk .................................................................................................. 78 2.3.4.3 Writing an NC program to a disk......................................................................................................... 79 2.3.4.4 Inserting sequence numbers into an NC program................................................................................ 80 2.3.4.5 Finding a character string in a NC program......................................................................................... 82 2.3.4.6 Replacing a character string in an NC program................................................................................... 83 2.3.4.7 Displaying the top/end of an NC program........................................................................................... 84 2.3.4.8 Entering a coordinate value into an NC program ................................................................................ 85 2.3.4.9 Stamping the machining time............................................................................................................... 86 2.3.4.10 Cutting character strings from an NC program.................................................................................... 87 2.3.4.11 Copying character strings from an NC program.................................................................................. 88 2.3.4.12 Pasting character strings to an NC program ........................................................................................ 89

2.3.5 Editing an MDI Program........................................................................................90 2.3.5.1 Finding a character string in an MDI program .................................................................................... 91 2.3.5.2 Replacing a character string in an MDI program................................................................................. 92 2.3.5.3 Displaying the top/end of an MDI program......................................................................................... 93 2.3.5.4 Sending an MDI program to the CNC ................................................................................................. 93 2.3.5.5 Cutting character strings from an MDI program ................................................................................. 94 2.3.5.6 Copying character strings from an MDI program................................................................................ 94 2.3.5.7 Pasting character strings to an MDI program ...................................................................................... 95 2.3.5.8 Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program.............................................................................. 96

2.3.6 DNC Schedule Operation .......................................................................................97 2.3.6.1 Executing a schedule operation............................................................................................................ 98 2.3.6.2 NC program for schedule operation..................................................................................................... 99 2.3.6.3 Setting a schedule operation .............................................................................................................. 100 2.3.6.4 Creating a schedule file...................................................................................................................... 101 2.3.6.5 Opening an existing schedule file ...................................................................................................... 104 2.3.6.6 Saving a schedule file under an alias ................................................................................................. 105

2.3.7 DNC Subprogram Call Operation ........................................................................106 2.3.7.1 Executing a subprogram call operation.............................................................................................. 107 2.3.7.2 NC program for subprogram call operation....................................................................................... 108 2.3.7.3 Specifying a folder storing subprograms ........................................................................................... 109

2.3.8 Monitoring the Execution Progress of DNC Operation .......................................111 2.4 SETTING ................................................................................................... 114

2.4.1 Setting of Settings ................................................................................................114 2.4.2 Setting Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer .................................................117 2.4.3 Setting Tool Offset ...............................................................................................120

2.4.3.1 Switching the type of tool offset data ................................................................................................ 122 2.4.3.2 Finding a tool offset data number ...................................................................................................... 123 2.4.3.3 Entering an increment for tool offset data ......................................................................................... 124 2.4.3.4 Entering a counter value for tool offset data...................................................................................... 125 2.4.3.5 Entering a measured value for tool offset data .................................................................................. 126 2.4.3.6 Clearing all tool offset data to zero.................................................................................................... 127

2.4.4 Setting a Custom Macro Variable ........................................................................128 2.4.4.1 Switching the type of custom macro variable.................................................................................... 130 2.4.4.2 Finding a custom macro variable number.......................................................................................... 131 2.4.4.3 Entering an increment for a custom macro variable .......................................................................... 132 2.4.4.4 Entering a counter value for a custom macro variable ...................................................................... 133 2.4.4.5 Clearing all custom macro variables to zero...................................................................................... 134

Page 17: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-3

2.4.4.6 Making a custom macro variable empty ............................................................................................ 134

2.4.5 Setting Workpiece Origin Offset..........................................................................135 2.4.5.1 Finding a workpiece origin offset data number ................................................................................. 137 2.4.5.2 Entering a measured value for workpiece origin offset data ............................................................. 138 2.4.5.3 Entering an increment for workpiece origin offset data .................................................................... 139

2.4.6 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System Shift .....................................................140 2.4.6.1 Entering an increment for workpiece coordinate system shift data................................................... 142

2.5 SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 143 2.5.1 Displaying Parameters..........................................................................................143

2.5.1.1 Finding a parameter number .............................................................................................................. 145 2.5.1.2 Setting parameters .............................................................................................................................. 146 2.5.1.3 Enabling parameter write ................................................................................................................... 147

2.5.2 Displaying the Diagnosis Screen..........................................................................148 2.5.2.1 Finding a diagnostic data number ...................................................................................................... 149

2.5.3 Displaying the System Configuration ..................................................................150 2.5.3.1 Outputting system configuration data to a file................................................................................... 151

2.5.4 Inputting/Outputting Data ....................................................................................152 2.5.4.1 Setting parameters for input/output.................................................................................................... 153 2.5.4.2 Displaying a list of various types of data files................................................................................... 155 2.5.4.3 Entering various types of data............................................................................................................ 156 2.5.4.4 Outputting various types of data ........................................................................................................ 159 2.5.4.5 Deleting various types of data files.................................................................................................... 161 2.5.4.6 Renaming various data files ............................................................................................................... 163

2.5.5 Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data ...............................................................164 2.5.5.1 Finding a pitch error compensation data number .............................................................................. 165 2.5.5.2 Entering an increment for pitch error compensation data.................................................................. 166

2.5.6 Displaying PMC Status ........................................................................................167 2.5.6.1 Finding a PMC status address............................................................................................................ 168 2.5.6.2 Displaying PMC status data in decimal or hexadecimal ................................................................... 169 2.5.6.3 Switching among PMC status paths................................................................................................... 170

2.5.7 Displaying PMC Alarms ......................................................................................171 2.5.8 Setting a PMC Counter.........................................................................................172

2.5.8.1 Finding a PMC counter number......................................................................................................... 173 2.5.8.2 Switching among PMC counter paths................................................................................................ 174

2.5.9 Setting a PMC Timer............................................................................................175 2.5.9.1 Finding a PMC timer number............................................................................................................. 177 2.5.9.2 Switching among PMC timer paths ................................................................................................... 178

2.5.10 Displaying a PMC Keep Relay ............................................................................179 2.5.10.1 Finding a PMC keep relay address .................................................................................................... 180 2.5.10.2 Displaying PMC keep relay data in decimal or hexadecimal ............................................................ 181 2.5.10.3 Setting a PMC keep relay................................................................................................................... 182 2.5.10.4 Switching among PMC keep relay paths ........................................................................................... 183

2.5.11 Setting PMC Data.................................................................................................184 2.5.11.1 Changing the number of groups of PMC data ................................................................................... 185 2.5.11.2 Setting the table control data of PMC data ........................................................................................ 186 2.5.11.3 Finding a group number of PMC data ............................................................................................... 187 2.5.11.4 Initializing the table control data of PMC data.................................................................................. 188 2.5.11.5 Switching among PMC data paths ..................................................................................................... 189 2.5.11.6 Displaying a data table of PMC data ................................................................................................. 190 2.5.11.7 Displaying a data table by specifying a PMC data group number .................................................... 193 2.5.11.8 Finding a PMC data address .............................................................................................................. 193 2.5.11.9 Setting data tables of PMC data......................................................................................................... 194

Page 18: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63924EN/01

c-4

2.5.11.10 Displaying PMC data in decimal or hexadecimal.............................................................................. 195

2.6 MESSAGES............................................................................................... 196 2.6.1 Displaying Alarm Messages.................................................................................196 2.6.2 Displaying Operator Messages.............................................................................197 2.6.3 Displaying the Alarm Message History ...............................................................198

2.6.3.1 Deleting the entire alarm message history ......................................................................................... 199

2.7 CONFIGURATION..................................................................................... 201 2.7.1 User Level and Password .....................................................................................201 2.7.2 Setting Basic Operation Package 2.......................................................................202

2.7.2.1 Setting a CNC to be connected .......................................................................................................... 204 2.7.2.2 Changing the user level and password............................................................................................... 206 2.7.2.3 Setting for each user level .................................................................................................................. 207

2.7.3 Switching Display Language................................................................................209 2.7.4 Selecting the Reference Folder of a Screen Definition File .................................211 2.7.5 Displaying Version Information...........................................................................212

3 CUSTOMIZATION...............................................................................213 3.1 OVERVIEW OF CUSTOMIZATION........................................................... 214 3.2 CUSTOMIZATION FILES .......................................................................... 215 3.3 BASIC CUSTOMIZATION ......................................................................... 219 3.4 OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION ............................................. 224

3.4.1 Navigation Definition File Configuration ............................................................225 3.4.2 confs Definition....................................................................................................226 3.4.3 funcs Definition....................................................................................................227 3.4.4 scrns Definition ....................................................................................................236 3.4.5 textstyles Definition .............................................................................................238 3.4.6 colors Definition...................................................................................................239

3.5 CUSTOMIZING CHILD SCREENS............................................................ 240 3.5.1 Definition Files and XML Schemas ............................................................ 241

3.5.2 Definition Data .....................................................................................................242 3.5.3 Common Definition Part ......................................................................................243

3.5.3.1 text definitions.................................................................................................................................... 245

3.5.4 Display Definition Part.........................................................................................246 3.5.4.1 label definitions .................................................................................................................................. 247 3.5.4.2 image definitions ................................................................................................................................ 249 3.5.4.3 pmcchk definitions ............................................................................................................................. 250 3.5.4.4 data_series definitions........................................................................................................................ 252 3.5.4.5 controlbase definitions ....................................................................................................................... 254 3.5.4.6 font definitions ................................................................................................................................... 256

3.5.5 Child Screen Definitions ......................................................................................258 3.5.5.1 Display position screen-specific definitions ...................................................................................... 259 3.5.5.2 Modal Screen-Specific Definitions.................................................................................................... 263 3.5.5.3 Actual Speed screen-specific definitions ........................................................................................... 264 3.5.5.4 Program Check screen-specific definitions ....................................................................................... 266 3.5.5.5 Program block screen-specific definitions......................................................................................... 267 3.5.5.6 Program Edit screen-specific definitions ........................................................................................... 269 3.5.5.7 MDI program edit screen-specific definitions ................................................................................... 270

Page 19: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-5

3.5.5.8 DNC Operation Monitor screen-specific definitions......................................................................... 271 3.5.5.9 DNC Schedule Setting screen-specific definitions............................................................................ 272 3.5.5.10 DNC Sub Program Call Setting screen-specific definitions.............................................................. 273 3.5.5.11 Handy screen-specific definitions...................................................................................................... 274 3.5.5.12 Timer screen-specific definitions....................................................................................................... 275 3.5.5.13 Tool Offset screen-specific definitions.............................................................................................. 276 3.5.5.14 Custom Macro screen-specific definitions......................................................................................... 279 3.5.5.15 Work Zero Offset screen-specific definitions.................................................................................... 283 3.5.5.16 Work Shift screen-specific definitions............................................................................................... 284 3.5.5.17 Parameter screen-specific definitions ................................................................................................ 285 3.5.5.18 Diagnosis screen-specific definitions ................................................................................................ 287 3.5.5.19 System Configuration screen-specific definitions ............................................................................. 289 3.5.5.20 Data I/O screen-specific definitions................................................................................................... 290 3.5.5.21 Pitch screen-specific definitions ........................................................................................................ 291 3.5.5.22 PMC Status screen-specific definitions ............................................................................................. 292 3.5.5.23 PMC Alarm screen-specific definitions............................................................................................. 293 3.5.5.24 PMC Counter screen-specific definitions .......................................................................................... 294 3.5.5.25 PMC Timer screen-specific definitions ............................................................................................. 295 3.5.5.26 PMC Keep Relay screen-specific definitions .................................................................................... 296 3.5.5.27 PMC Data screen-specific definitions ............................................................................................... 297 3.5.5.28 Alarm Message screen-specific definitions ....................................................................................... 300 3.5.5.29 Operator Message screen-specific definitions ................................................................................... 301 3.5.5.30 Alarm History screen-specific definitions ......................................................................................... 302

3.6 CUSTOMIZING THE STATUS BAR .......................................................... 303 3.6.1 Status Bar Displays ..............................................................................................304 3.6.2 Specifying the Size of Status Display Items.........................................................305 3.6.3 Selecting Status Display Items .............................................................................306 3.6.4 Specifying Status Bar Colors ...............................................................................307

3.6.4.1 Specifying status bar basic colors ...................................................................................................... 308 3.6.4.2 Specifying status bar display item colors........................................................................................... 310

3.7 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE DISPLAY AREA.................................... 312 3.7.1 Specifying Message Display Area Colors............................................................313

3.8 CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA............................... 314 3.8.1 PMC Status Area Displays ...................................................................................315 3.8.2 Specifying PMC Status Area Colors ....................................................................316

3.9 CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION........................................................... 319

APPENDIX

A SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS ................................................325 B CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES ......................................340

B.1 FILES RELATED TO A RESOURCE DLL ................................................. 342 B.2 MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE............................................................... 344 B.3 MESSAGE FILE FORMAT ........................................................................ 347 B.4 CREATING A RESOURCE DLL ................................................................ 348

Page 20: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)
Page 21: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 1 -

1 SETUP This chapter explains the environment for operating Basic Operation Package 2 and the method of setup.

Page 22: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 2 -

1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT The operating environment for Basic Operation Package 2 is described below. As hardware, a commercially available personal computer or

PANEL i connected with the CNC via HSSB or Ethernet is required. (Pentium III 1 GHz or higher and a memory size of 256M or more are recommended.)

As an operating system, Windows 2000 Professional (SP2 or later) or Windows XP is required.

Page 23: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 3 -

1.2 INSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 This section describes how to install Basic Operation Package 2. Procedure 1 For use based on an HSSB connection, install the necessary

drivers. For details, refer to the resource note on the drivers disk (A08B-0084-K790) or FOCAS2 driver library disk (A02B-0207-K737). The FOCAS2 libraries are installed automatically by the installer of Basic Operation Package 2, so that the FOCAS2 libraries need not be installed beforehand.

2 Insert the installation CD for Basic Operation Package 2 into the drive. Double-click Setup.exe on the CD to start the installer.

3 When the installer is started, the screen below appears. Click the <OK> button.

If Basic Operation Package 2 is already installed, the screen

below appears.

Page 24: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 4 -

If you want to install Basic Operation Package 2 at the same location as before, select [Repair FANUC Basic Operation Package 2] then click the <Finish> button. Basic Operation Package 2 already installed is overwritten automatically. You proceed to step 9. CAUTION

If Basic Operation Package 2 is customized, the contents of Basic Operation Package 2, when overwritten, may be lost. Be sure to check that the definition file copied to a separate folder is customized. For details, see Section 3.1, "OVERVIEW OF CUSTOMIZATION".

4 First, install the run-time library of Microsoft .NET Framework

1.1. If .NET Framework 1.1 is already installed, you automatically proceed to step 5.

(1) The license agreement screen for .NET Framework 1.1

appears. Select [I agree] then click the <Install> button.

Page 25: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 5 -

(2) The installation of .NET Framework 1.1 is started.

(3) Upon completion of .NET Framework 1.1 installation, the screen below appears. Click the <OK> button.

5 The screen below appears. Click the <Next> button.

Page 26: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 6 -

6 Select the FOCAS2 libraries (HSSB version and Ethernet version) required for connection with the CNC then click the <Next> button.

7 Specify an installation destination folder then click the <Next>

button. If multiple user names are registered on the personal computer used, select [Everyone] to allow use by all users or select [Just me] to allow use by only the user executing the installation.

Page 27: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 7 -

By clicking the <Browse…> button, the installation destination can be changed. By clicking the <Disk Cost…> button, the size of free disk space can be checked.

8 The screen below appears. Click the <Next> button to start the

installation of Basic Operation Package 2.

Page 28: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 8 -

9 Upon normal completion of Basic Operation Package 2 installation, the screen below appears. Click the <Close> button to exit.

Page 29: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 9 -

1.3 UNINSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 This section describes how to uninstall Basic Operation Package 2. Procedure 1 Choose [Start Menu] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] to open the

control panel.

2 Open [Add or Remove Programs]. From the currently installed programs, select [FANUC Basic Operation Package 2].

3 Click the <Remove> button. A message for confirmation

appears. Click the <Yes> button to continue operation.

4 Basic Operation Package 2 is uninstalled. This uninstallation

ends automatically.

NOTE Even if Basic Operation Package 2 is uninstalled,

the FOCAS2 libraries and .NET Framework 1.1 are not removed.

Page 30: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 10 -

5 Basic Operation Package 2 can also be uninstalled using another method, that is, the installer. Insert the installation CD for Basic Operation Package 2 to start the installer. The screen below appears.

6 Select [Remove FANUC Basic Operation Package 2] then click

the <Finish> button. The uninstallation of Basic Operation Package 2 is started.

Page 31: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 11 -

7 Upon completion of uninstallation, the message below appears. Click the <Close> button to exit.

Page 32: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 12 -

1.4 PROCEDURE AT INITIAL STARTUP When Basic Operation Package 2 is started initially, a connection destination CNC needs to be specified. Moreover, a screen size and display language need to be selected as required. Procedure 1 Choose [Start Menu] → [Programs] → [Basic Operation Package

2] to start Basic Operation Package 2.

2 In the state immediately after installation, the password input screen appears after the title screen.

3 Enter the initial password "fanuc" then click the <OK> button. The connection setting screen appears. Set a connection destination CNC. For the methods of connection setting and password handling and other setting items on the setting screen, see Section 2.7, "CONFIGURATION".

4 Upon completion of setting, click the <OK> button. The screen

below appears. Click the <OK> button on this screen. Basic Operation Package 2 is restarted.

5 When Basic Operation Package 2 is initially started, the

following screen size and display language are set: Setting item name Setting

Screen size (reference folder) 640×480 (FANUC_VGA) Display language en (English)

To set a screen size of 1024×768, see Subsection 2.7.4,

"Selecting the Reference Folder of a Screen Definition File". To change the display language to Japanese, see Subsection 2.7.3, "Switching Display Language".

Page 33: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 1.SETUP

- 13 -

1.5 SETTING THE CNC PARAMETERS This section describes how to set the minimum required CNC parameters for operating Basic Operation Package 2 normally.

NOTE If the CNC parameters are not set, the writing and

display of NC programs and MDI commands cannot be performed normally.

NOTE To set the parameters, first establish the following

status: • Settings

- [Parameter Write] enabled • Operation

- Emergency stop, or stopped or paused in MDI mode

For the method of setting of settings, see Subsection 2.4.1, "Setting of Settings".

Procedure

1 Press the function key .

2 Press the submenu key to display the [Parameter]

screen.

Page 34: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

1.SETUP B-63924EN/01

- 14 -

3 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 4 Set the following parameters:

Meaning Setting

TV check No. 0000 bit 0 → 0 Termination of registration with M02, M30, or M99 No. 3201 bit 6 → 1

Page 35: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 15 -

2 STANDARD OPERATION This chapter describes the method of operation in the standard state (where no screen customization is performed) of Basic Operation Package 2.

Page 36: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 16 -

2.1 SCREEN LAYOUT AND COMMON ITEMS This section describes the standard screen layout, and the common display items and operation method of each screen.

2.1.1 Configuration of the Standard Screen The screen of Basic Operation Package 2 consists of a title bar, status bar, data display area, and operation key controls.

↑ When the vertical operation keys are displayed

Page 37: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 17 -

Number in the screen

Elements making up the screen

Description

① Title bar If a communication error occurs, for example, when the power to the connected CNC is turned off, the error code is displayed.

② Status bar

CNC status is displayed. The upper row displays alarm state (starts blinking when any of the connected CNCs is placed in alarm state), an NC program number, sequence number, current time, and combo box for selecting an operation target CNC (only when connections are made with multiple CNCs). The lower row displays the operation mode, automatic operation state, and alarm state of the operation target CNC.

③ Data display area

This area displays child screens for displaying information about the operation target CNC and for executing various functions. A thin frame is displayed around the currently active child screen, and the operation keys for the child screen are enabled.

④ Operation key control

A set of keys for performing operations is provided. Switch the screen display or perform a screen operation by clicking the desired key on the screen or pressing the corresponding soft key (or function key when using the keyboard of the personal computer).

Page 38: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 18 -

• Operation key control

a) The key controls vertically arranged on the right side of the standard screen are displayed at all times on a 15-inch screen. On a 10.4-inch screen, the key controls are displayed or hidden by using the corresponding soft key (or [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F11] on the keyboard of the personal computer).

b) To operate the displayed soft keys with the keyboard of the personal computer, use the [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F3] through [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F10] keys.

• Method of selecting an operation target CNC

1 When connections are made with multiple CNCs, the combo box for selecting an operation target CNC is displayed on the status bar. When you press the [Alt] + [↑] keys (or the [Ctrl] + [Tab] keys) on the keyboard, or the [AUX] + [↑] keys (or the [CUSTOM] + [ALTER] keys) on the MDI panel, the combo box is selected.

Select a desired CNC by using the [↑] or [↓] key on the keyboard, or the [↑] or [↓] key on the MDI panel.

2 To return to the state where the child screen was selected, press the [Alt] + [↑] keys (or the [Ctrl] + [Tab] keys) on the keyboard, or the [AUX] + [↑] keys (or the [CUSTOM] + [ALTER] keys) on the MDI panel again.

• Method of selecting an active child screen

a) When multiple child screens are displayed, a thin frame is displayed around the currently active child screen. You can switch the active child screen each time you press the [Ctrl] + [Tab] keys on the keyboard, or the [CUSTOM] + [ALTER] keys on the MDI panel.

• Method of selecting an item on a child screen

a) Each time you press the [Tab] key, [↑] key, or [↓] key on the keyboard, or the [ALTER] key, [↑] key, [↓] key on the MDI panel, you can switch the active item. Depending on the screen, this operation can activate a desired input item or scroll screen display.

Page 39: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 19 -

2.1.2 Key Controls and Screen Transition In the standard state, the operation key controls are classified as indicated below.

Key control element Description Function keys

Keys corresponding to CNC function keys. Each key is used to select a function group for a child screen to be displayed.

Submenu keys

Keys corresponding to the submenus of each function key. Each key is used to select a child screen to be displayed. When there are too many submenus to be displayed at a time, the remaining

submenus can be displayed by pressing the key.

Display/operation switching key

This key is displayed when the currently active child screen allows operations such as display switching and data input. Each time you press the key, the submenus or operation keys are displayed.

Operation keys on each child screen

Operation keys are displayed when the display/operation switching key is pressed to select operation key display instead of submenu key display. In the example at the left, the operation keys for the [Overall Position] screen are indicated. When there are too many operation keys to be displayed at a time, the

remaining keys can be displayed by pressing the key.

Page 40: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 20 -

The table below indicates the screens displayed when you press the keys of the operation key controls, and also indicates the operable functions on each screen.

Function key

Submenu key

Screen displayed Operation key

Function executed

Resets coordinates.

Presets relative coordinates.

Sets the floating reference position.

Overall Position

Presets the workpiece coordinate system.

Modal

Actual Speed

Sets the floating reference position.

Absolute

Presets the workpiece coordinate system.

Modal

Actual Speed

Resets relative coordinates.

Presets relative coordinates.

Sets the floating reference position.

Relative

Presets the workpiece coordinate system.

Modal

Actual Speed

Page 41: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 21 -

Machine

Modal

Actual Speed

Distance to go

Modal

Actual Speed

Searches for an NC program.

Program Check

Searches for a specified sequence number.

Current Block/Next Block (program being executed)

Starts NC program editing. (Switches the mode to the edit mode.)

Selects an NC program to be executed.

Switches the NC directory display.

Creates an NC program.

Renames an NC program.

Selects an NC program to be copied or moved.

Program Edit (directory mode)

Copies an NC program selected by [Select] to a specified folder.

Page 42: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 22 -

Moves an NC program selected by [Select] to a specified folder.

Condenses an NC program.

Sets the attribute of an NC program.

Sets the protect level of an NC program with the 8-level protection function.

Deletes an NC program.

Creates a folder.

Renames a folder.

Sets the attribute of a folder.

Deletes a folder.

Ends NC program editing. (Switches the mode to the directory mode.)

Writes an NC program back to the CNC.

Inserts an NC program from a disk.

Writes an NC program to a disk.

Inserts sequence numbers.

Program Edit (edit mode)

Finds a character string in an NC program.

Page 43: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 23 -

Replaces a character string in an NC program with another character string.

Cuts character strings from an NC program.

Copies character strings from an NC program.

Pastes character strings cut or copied by [Cut] or [Copy] at a specified location in the NC program.

Displays the top of an NC program.

Displays the end of an NC program.

Enters the current position.

Inserts the machine time.

Finds a character string in an MDI program.

Replaces a character string in an MDI program with another character string.

Sends an edited MDI program to the CNC.

Displays the top of an MDI program.

Displays the end of an MDI program.

Cuts character strings from an MDI program.

MDI Program

Copies character strings from an MDI program.

Page 44: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 24 -

Pastes character strings cut or copied by [Cut] or [Copy] at a specified location in the MDI program.

Inserts sequence numbers.

Searches for an MDI program.

Program Check

Searches for a specified sequence number.

DNC Operation Monitor

Creates a schedule file.

Saves a schedule file under an alias.

Adds an NC program to be executed to the schedule.

Sets the number of NC program repeats.

DNC Schedule Setting

Deletes an NC program from the schedule.

DNC Sub Program Call Setting

Sets a folder for calling an NC subprogram.

Confirms the input of a numeric value (writes a numeric value to the CNC).

Cancels the input of a numeric value.

Turns on bit-type data.

Handy

Turns off bit-type data.

Page 45: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 25 -

Confirms the input of a numeric value (writes a numeric value to the CNC).

Timer

Cancels the input of a numeric value.

Switches the type of display data. (Geometry data for a lathe system, or tool length data for a machining center system)

Switches the type of display data. (Wear data for a lathe system, or tool radius data for a machining center system)

Clears all tool offset data to zero.

Inputs a measured tool offset value. (Inputs a numeric value directly.)

Displays a specified number.

Inputs tool offset data as an incremental value.

Tool Offset

Inputs a tool offset data counter value. (Sets a relative coordinate.)

Switches the type of display variable.

Custom Macro

Inputs a custom macro variable as an incremental value.

Page 46: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 26 -

Inputs a custom macro variable counter value. (Sets a relative coordinate.)

Clears all custom macro variables to zero.(Local, common 1, common 2)

Make a specified custom macro variable empty.

Displays a specified number.

Inputs a workpiece origin offset counter value. (Sets a relative coordinate.)

Inputs a measure workpiece origin offset value. (Inputs a numeric value directly.)

Work Zero Offset

Displays a specified number.

Work Shift

Inputs a workpiece coordinate system shift value as an incremental value.

Displays a specified number.

Confirms the input of a numeric value (writes a numeric value to the CNC).

Cancels the input of a numeric value.

Turns on bit-type data.

Turns off bit-type data.

Parameter

Enables/disables parameter writing. (Disables writing when PWE is on, or enables writing when PWE is off.)

Page 47: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 27 -

Moves the cursor to the previous parameter number.

Moves the cursor to the next parameter number.

Moves the cursor to the left-hand bit.

Moves the cursor to the right-hand bit.

Displays the previous page.

Displays the next page.

Turns on all bits of bit-type data.

Turns off all bits of bit-type data.

Displays a specified number.

Moves the screen display to the previous number.

Moves the screen display to the next number.

Displays the previous page.

Diagnosis

Displays the next page.

System Configuration

Writes system configuration data to disk.

Data I/O

Makes a setting for input/output.

Page 48: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 28 -

Inputs various data items.

Outputs various data items.

Refreshes the screen display.

Deletes various data files.

Renames various data files.

Displays a specified number.

Pitch

Inputs pitch error data as an incremental value.

Searches for a specified address.

Switches between decimal display and hexadecimal display.

Selects a display target PMC.

Moves the cursor to the previous PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the next PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the left-hand bit.

PMC Status

Moves the cursor to the right-hand bit.

Page 49: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 29 -

Displays the previous page.

Displays the next page.

PMC Alarm

Displays a specified number.

PMC Counter

Selects a display target PMC.

Displays a specified number.

PMC Timer

Selects a display target PMC.

Searches for a specified address.

Switches between decimal display and hexadecimal display.

Selects a display target PMC.

Confirms the input of a numeric value (writes a numeric value to the CNC).

Cancels the input of a numeric value.

Turns on bit-type data.

PMC Keep Relay

Turns off bit-type data.

Page 50: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 30 -

Moves the cursor to the previous PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the next PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the left-hand bit.

Moves the cursor to the right-hand bit.

Displays the previous page.

Displays the next page.

Switches the screen display to the data table screen.

Sets the number of groups.

Displays the table with a specified number.

Perform initialization by deleting the entire data control.

PMC Data (table control)

Selects a display target PMC.

Switches the screen display to the table control screen.

Displays the data table with a specified number.

PMC Data (table data)

Searches for a specified address.

PMC Data (bit-type table data)

Switches the screen display to the table control screen.

Page 51: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 31 -

Displays the data table with a specified number.

Searches for a specified address.

Switches between decimal display and hexadecimal display.

Confirms the input of a numeric value (writes a numeric value to the CNC).

Cancels the input of a numeric value.

Turns on bit-type data.

Turns off bit-type data.

Moves the cursor to the previous PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the next PMC address.

Moves the cursor to the left-hand bit.

Moves the cursor to the right-hand bit.

Displays the previous page.

Displays the next page.

Alarm Message

Page 52: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 32 -

Operator Message

Alarm History

Deletes alarm history data.

Setup Sets the operation and configuration of Basic Operation Package 2.

Language Select Setting Selects a display language.

Folder Select Setting Selects the reference folder of a screen definition file.

About Basic Operation Package 2

Displays version information.

Page 53: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 33 -

2.1.3 Display of Messages from Connected CNCs Basic Operation Package 2 displays, on a real-time basis, alarm messages and operator messages issued from all connected CNCs.

• Display format An alarm message is displayed in red in the following format: [ CNC-number: CNC-name ] alarm-number alarm-description

An operator message is displayed in yellow in the following

format: [ CNC-number: CNC-name ] operator-message-number message

The same CNC number and CNC name as registered on the

[Setup] screen are displayed. For the meaning of each message displayed, refer to the

operator's manual of each CNC or the relevant operator's manual issued by each machine tool builder.

Page 54: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 34 -

• Method of closing the area for displaying messages from CNCs One of the following two methods can be used to close the message display area: a) Click the <OK> button to the right of the message display

area.

b) Press the [Enter] key on the keyboard or press the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel in the message display area.

To recheck the description of a message, use the [Alarm

Message] screen and the [Operator Message] screen. For details, see Section 2.6, "MESSAGES".

Page 55: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 35 -

2.1.4 Monitoring the Power State of Connected CNCs Basic Operation Package 2 monitors the state of communication with all connected CNCs. If communication is disconnected for a cause such as the power-off state of a CNC, an error is displayed in the following format on the title bar:

<CNC-number: CNC-name: error-code> The same CNC number and CNC name as registered on the [Setup] screen are displayed. One of the following error codes is displayed:

Mode of connection Error code Type of error Ethernet connection Err-16 Socket error HSSB connection Err-9 HSSB error

If connections are made with multiple CNCs, multiple errors may be displayed at a time as in the example below.

If communication with only one CNC connected fails or communication with the currently selected CNC among multiple CNCs connected fails, the status bar becomes blank, and each child screen provides details of the error. (The screen below shows an example of error when an Ethernet connection is made.)

The following items are displayed: - Screen name (on a screen definition file) - CNC number - Error code - Type of error - Error description

Page 56: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 36 -

When communication is resumed, for example, because the power to the CNC is turned on, the error display of the title bar and each child screen disappears, and a connection is established again.

Page 57: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 37 -

2.2 POSITION DISPLAY This section describes how to display positions such as the current position of the CNC.

2.2.1 Overall Position Display The overall positions (relative position, absolute position, machine position, and distance to go) of the CNC are displayed. Modal information (such as G codes) and actual speed information (actual feedrate and spindle speed) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [POSITION] function key and [ALL] submenu key. This screen allows you to reset and preset relative coordinates, set the floating reference position, and preset the workpiece coordinate system.

For details of each function, see the following: • Resetting relative coordinates

→ Subsection 2.2.3.1, "Resetting relative coordinates" • Presetting relative coordinates

→ Subsection 2.2.3.2, "Presetting relative coordinates" • Setting the floating reference position

→ Subsection 2.2.3.3, "Setting the machine position to the floating reference position"

• Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

→ Subsection 2.2.3.4, "Presetting the workpiece coordinate system"

Page 58: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 38 -

2.2.2 Displaying the Absolute Position The absolute position of the CNC is displayed. Modal information (such as G codes) and actual speed information (actual feedrate and spindle speed) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [POSITION] function key and [ABSOLUTE] submenu key. This screen allows you to set the floating reference position and preset the workpiece coordinate system.

For details of each function, see the following: • Setting the floating reference position

→ Subsection 2.2.3.3, "Setting the machine position to the floating reference position"

• Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

→ Subsection 2.2.3.4, "Presetting the workpiece coordinate system"

Page 59: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 39 -

2.2.3 Displaying the Relative Position The relative position of the CNC is displayed. Modal information (such as G codes) and actual speed information (actual feedrate and spindle speed) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [POSITION] function key and [RELATIVE] submenu key. This screen allows you to reset and preset relative coordinates, set the floating reference position, and preset the workpiece coordinate system.

For details of each function, see the following: • Resetting relative coordinates

→ Subsection 2.2.3.1, "Resetting relative coordinates" • Presetting relative coordinates

→ Subsection 2.2.3.2, "Presetting relative coordinates" • Setting the floating reference position

→ Subsection 2.2.3.3, "Setting the machine position to the floating reference position"

• Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

→ Subsection 2.2.3.4, "Presetting the workpiece coordinate system"

Page 60: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 40 -

2.2.3.1 Resetting relative coordinates The relative coordinates of the CNC can be reset to 0. Procedure 1 If the [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) is currently

not displayed, display the [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) as described in Subsection 2.2.3, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Subsection 2.2.1, "Overall Position Display").

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Relative -

Origin Relative Position] screen.

Page 61: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 41 -

4 From the list of the coordinate axes, select one or more axes for which the relative coordinates are to be reset.

To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button.

To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.

5 Clicking the <OK> button resets the selected relative coordinates to 0.

Page 62: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 42 -

2.2.3.2 Presetting relative coordinates The relative coordinates of the CNC can be preset to entered values. Procedure 1 If the [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) is currently

not displayed, display the [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) as described in Subsection 2.2.3, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Subsection 2.2.1, "Overall Position Display").

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Relative -

Preset Relative Position] screen.

Page 63: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 43 -

4 Select the axis for which the relative coordinate is to be preset, then enter the value to which the relative coordinate is to be preset.

5 Clicking the <OK> button presets the selected relative coordinate.

Page 64: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 44 -

2.2.3.3 Setting the machine position to the floating reference position

The machine position of the CNC can be set to the floating reference position.

NOTE To set the floating reference position, the

corresponding CNC option is required. Procedure 1 If the [Absolute] screen or [Relative] screen (or [Overall

Position] screen) is currently not displayed, display the [Absolute] screen or [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) as described in Subsection 2.2.2, "Displaying the Absolute Position", or Subsection 2.2.3, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Subsection 2.2.1, "Overall Position Display").

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Relative -

Floating Reference Point] screen.

Page 65: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 45 -

4 Select one or more axes for which the machine position is to be set to the floating reference position.

To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button. To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.

5 Clicking the <OK> button sets the machine position to the

floating reference position. The set values can be checked by referencing parameter No.

1244.

Page 66: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 46 -

2.2.3.4 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system of the CNC can be preset. The absolute coordinate on the preset axis is set as follows: Absolute coordinate value = current absolute coordinate value - the value on the corresponding axis for workpiece origin offset number 0

NOTE To preset the workpiece coordinate system, the

corresponding CNC option is required. Procedure 1 If the [Absolute] screen or [Relative] screen (or [Overall

Position] screen) is currently not displayed, display the [Absolute] screen or [Relative] screen (or [Overall Position] screen) as described in Subsection 2.2.2, "Displaying the Absolute Position", or Subsection 2.2.3, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Subsection 2.2.1, "Overall Position Display").

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Relative -

Preset Work Coordinate] screen.

Page 67: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 47 -

4 Select one or more axes for which the workpiece coordinate system is to be preset.

To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button. To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.

5 Clicking the <OK> button presets the workpiece coordinate system.

Page 68: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 48 -

2.2.4 Displaying the Machine Position The machine position of the CNC is displayed. Modal information (such as G codes) and actual speed information (actual feedrate and spindle speed) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [POSITION] function key and [MACHINE] submenu key. No operation can be performed on this screen.

Page 69: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 49 -

2.2.5 Displaying the Distance to Go The distance to go of the CNC is displayed. Modal information (such as G codes) and actual speed information (actual feedrate and spindle speed) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [POSITION] function key and [DISTANCE] submenu key. No operation can be performed on this screen.

Page 70: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 50 -

2.3 NC PROGRAM This section explains how to display, edit, and check NC programs stored in the CNC.

2.3.1 Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed The details of the NC program currently being executed are displayed. The relative position and modal information (such as G codes) are displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and the [CHECK] submenu key. This screen allows you to search for an NC program and search for a sequence number.

Page 71: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 51 -

2.3.1.1 Searching for an NC program A search can be made for an NC program.

NOTE To search for an NC program, set the following

status: • Operation

- EDIT mode, or - Stopped in MEMORY mode

Procedure 1 If the [Program Check] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Check] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.1, "Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key .

4 The NC program is searched for.

Page 72: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 52 -

2.3.1.2 Searching for a sequence number The currently selected NC program can be searched for a specified sequence number.

NOTE Before a search can be made for a sequence

number, the sequence number must be inserted in the NC program.

Moreover, set the following status: • Operation

- MEMORY mode, or - Stopped in REMOTE mode

Procedure 1 If the [Program Check] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Check] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.1, "Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Program Check

- Sequence Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a search target sequence number then click the <OK>

button. 5 The cursor moves to the specified sequence number.

NOTE If the NC program does not include a specified

sequence number, the PS060 (SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND) alarm is issued.

Page 73: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 53 -

2.3.2 Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of the NC Program Being Executed

Information about the current and next blocks of the NC program being executed is displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and the [BLOCK] submenu key. No operation can be performed on this screen.

Page 74: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 54 -

2.3.3 Displaying the NC Program Directory The directory of NC programs on the CNC memory is displayed. Memory use status is displayed at the same time. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [EDIT] submenu key. This screen allows you to copy or delete an NC program, modify comments, select a program to be executed, and change the display format.

WARNING Before starting the machine to machine a

workpiece after editing an NC program, be sure to check that the command values, compensation values, current position, and external signal settings of the NC program are correct.

NOTE To perform NC program editing, set the following

status: • PW alarm 000 (TURN OFF POWER) not

issued • Protect key

- Released For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 75: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 55 -

2.3.3.1 Switching the NC program directory display The display of the [Program Edit] screen can be switched. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Switch the mode of program directory display by using the

operation key .

In the overall display mode, the program directory displays "Name", "Size", and "Modified (date and time)".

In the detail display mode, the program directory additionally

displays "Comment", "Attribute", and "Protect (level)". Moreover, "Folder Attr" is displayed above the program directory.

Page 76: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 56 -

• Attribute display The attributes below are displayed for NC programs and folders.

Symbol Description R Editing disabled D Display disabled E Encoded (NC program only)

• Protect level The display format of an NC program protect level is "change

protect level/output protect level". When "2/5" is set for an NC program, for example, the change protect level of the NC program is 2, and the output protect level of the NC program is 5. For the setting and changing of a protect level, see Subsection 2.3.3.9, "Setting the protect level of an NC program".

Page 77: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 57 -

2.3.3.2 Selecting an NC program to be executed An NC program to be executed can be selected.

NOTE To select an NC program to be executed, set the

following status: • Operation

- EDIT mode, or reset in MEMORY mode Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an NC program to be executed.

4 Press the operation key . The specified program is

selected as the NC program to be executed, and the number (or name) of the program is displayed on the status bar.

Page 78: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 58 -

2.3.3.3 Creating an NC program A new NC program can be created on the CNC. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder where an NC program is to be created.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Create Program] screen.

5 Enter a desired NC program name in the text box then click the

<OK> button. An NC program is created in the specified folder. This operation, however, creates only an empty NC program in the folder on the CNC. To edit the contents of the NC program, see Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

Page 79: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 59 -

2.3.3.4 Deleting an NC program An NC program on the CNC can be deleted.

NOTE To delete an NC program, release the protection of

the NC program. Moreover, set the following status:

• Operation - Stopped

Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an NC program to be deleted.

* Multiple programs can be selected and deleted at a time.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Delete Program] screen.

5 Click the <OK> button. The selected program is deleted from the memory of the CNC.

Page 80: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 60 -

2.3.3.5 Renaming an NC program An NC program on the CNC can be renamed.

NOTE To rename an NC program, release the protection

of the NC program. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an NC program to be renamed.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Rename Program] screen.

5 Enter a desired new name in the text box. 6 Click the <OK> button. The NC program is renamed.

Page 81: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 61 -

2.3.3.6 Copying an NC program An NC program on the CNC can be copied to a specified folder.

NOTE To copy an NC program, release the protection of

the NC program. Moreover, set the following status: • Operation

- EDIT mode Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a copy source NC program.

4 Press the operation key to confirm the specified NC

program as the copy source. 5 Select a copy destination folder.

6 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Copy] screen.

Page 82: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 62 -

7 To assign a new name to the NC program produced by copy operation, enter the new NC program name in the text box.

8 Click the <OK> button. The NC program is copied to the

specified folder.

Page 83: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 63 -

2.3.3.7 Moving an NC program An NC program on the CNC can be moved to a specified folder.

NOTE To move an NC program, release the protection of

the NC program. Moreover, set the following status: • Operation

- EDIT mode Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an NC program to be moved.

4 Press the operation key to confirm the specified NC

program as the move source. 5 Select a move destination folder.

6 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Move] screen.

Page 84: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 64 -

7 To assign a new name to the moved NC program, enter the new NC program name in the text box.

8 Click the <OK> button. The NC program is moved to the

specified folder.

Page 85: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 65 -

2.3.3.8 Setting the attribute of an NC program The attribute of an NC program on the CNC can be set.

NOTE To set the attribute of an NC program, set the

following status: • Operation

- Stopped • When the attribute for disabling display is set

- Program protection released • When the attribute for encoding is set

- Encoding released Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 If the screen is currently displayed in the overall display mode,

press to switch to the detail display mode. For the

detail display mode, see Subsection 2.3.3.1, "Switching the NC program directory display".

4 Select an NC program whose attribute is to be set.

Page 86: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 66 -

5 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Program Attribute] screen.

6 Check an item to be set then click the <OK> button.

Page 87: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 67 -

2.3.3.9 Setting the protect level of an NC program A protect level can be set for an NC program on the CNC.

NOTE To set a protect level for an NC program, the

8-level protection option is required. Moreover, set the following status: • Operation

- Stopped Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 If the screen is currently displayed in the overall display mode,

press to switch to the detail display mode. For the

detail display mode, see Subsection 2.3.3.1, "Switching the NC program directory display".

4 Select an NC program whose protect level is to be changed.

Page 88: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 68 -

5 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Protect Level] screen. The operation level set on the CNC is displayed on this screen.

6 Set the change protect level and output protect level then click the <OK> button. The NC program whose protect level is set here is protected when an operation of the set level or lower is performed on the NC program.

Page 89: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 69 -

2.3.3.10 Condensing an NC program An NC program on the CNC can be condensed.

NOTE To condense an NC program, release the

protection of the NC program. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an NC program to be condensed.

4 Press the operation key . The NC program is condensed.

Page 90: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 70 -

2.3.3.11 Creating a folder on the CNC A new folder can be created on the CNC.

NOTE To create a folder on the CNC, set the following

status: • Operation

- Stopped Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a location where a folder is to be created.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Create Folder] screen.

Page 91: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 71 -

5 Enter a desired folder name then click the <OK> button.

Page 92: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 72 -

2.3.3.12 Deleting a folder from the CNC A folder on the CNC can be deleted.

NOTE To delete a folder from the CNC, set the following

status: • Protection of the target folder released • Target folder made empty • Operation

- Stopped Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder to be deleted.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Delete Folder] screen.

5 Click the <OK> button to delete the folder.

Page 93: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 73 -

2.3.3.13 Renaming a folder on the CNC A folder on the CNC can be renamed.

NOTE To rename a folder on the CNC, release the

protection of the folder. Moreover, set the following status:

• Operation - Stopped

Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder to be renamed.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Rename Folder] screen.

5 Enter a desired new folder name in the text box. 6 Click the <OK> button. The folder is renamed.

Page 94: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 74 -

2.3.3.14 Setting the attribute of a folder on the CNC The attribute of a folder on the CNC can be set.

NOTE To set the attribute of a folder on the CNC, set the

following status: • Operation

- Stopped • When the attribute for disabling display is set

- Program protection released Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder whose attribute is to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Folder Attribute] screen.

5 Check an item to be set then click the <OK> button.

Page 95: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 75 -

2.3.4 Editing an NC Program An NC program on the CNC can be read for editing into the edit screen of Basic Operation Package 2. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [EDIT] submenu key then selecting an edit target NC program and pressing the [Edit Start] operation key.

WARNING • An NC program in CNC program memory cannot

be updated simply by editing the NC program on this screen. Be sure to write the NC program back to the CNC after editing.

• Before starting the machine to machine a workpiece after writing an NC program back to the CNC, be sure to check that the command values, compensation values, current position, and external signal settings of the NC program are correct.

NOTE To perform NC program editing, set the following

status: • PW alarm 000 (TURN OFF POWER) not

issued • Protect key

- Released For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

↑ [Program Edit] screen (operation keys)

Page 96: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 76 -

When an edit operation is performed, "Modified" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

↑ [Program Edit] screen (operation keys, "Modified" displayed)

Page 97: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 77 -

2.3.4.1 Writing an NC program back to the CNC The NC program being edited on the edit screen of Basic Operation Package 2 can be written back to the CNC. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Write Back to NC] screen.

4 Specify a name for the NC program to be written back to the

CNC. When the NC program to be written back is to be executed next,

check the [Save as main.] check box. Click the <OK> button.

Page 98: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 78 -

2.3.4.2 Inserting an NC program from a disk The NC program stored in a file on the hard disk (or another external memory unit) can be inserted into the NC program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Move the cursor to a position at which you want to insert an NC

program.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Open] screen.

5 Select an NC program to be inserted from the hard disk (or another external memory unit) then click the <OK> button.

The contents of the file are inserted at the cursor position.

Page 99: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 79 -

2.3.4.3 Writing an NC program to a disk The entire NC program being edited can be written as a file to the hard disk (or another external memory unit). Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Save As]

screen.

4 Enter a name for the file to be written to the hard disk (or another external memory unit) then click the <Save(S)> button.

Page 100: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 80 -

2.3.4.4 Inserting sequence numbers into an NC program In the NC program being edited, sequence numbers can be automatically inserted for newly created lines. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Insert Sequence Number] screen.

4 Check the [Insert sequence number] check box then set an initial value and increment. Click the <OK> button.

When you perform a new line operation, a sequence number is

automatically inserted.

Depending on settings, sequence numbers can be automatically inserted. For the setting of settings, see Subsection 2.4.1, "Setting of Settings".

Page 101: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 81 -

Explanation The initial values of the [Program Edit - Insert Sequence

Number] screen can be set using the following parameters:

Meaning Setting Enabling automatic insertion No. 0000 bit 5 → 1 Increment No. 3216

Page 102: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 82 -

2.3.4.5 Finding a character string in a NC program A search can be made for a specified character string in the NC program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Find] screen.

4 Enter a character string to be found, then select a search direction (Up or Down). Click the <OK> button. If the character string is found, the character string is displayed in reverse video. If the character string is not found, the message "The character string could not be found." is displayed.

↑ Example where the specified character string was found

Page 103: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 83 -

2.3.4.6 Replacing a character string in an NC program In the NC program being edited, a specified character string can be found and replaced with another character string. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Replace] screen.

4 Enter a character string to be replaced and a replacing character string, then select a search direction (Up or Down). Click the <OK> button. If the character string to be replaced is found, the character string is converted to the replacing character string, which is displayed in reverse video. (At this time, "Modified" is displayed.) If the character string to be replaced is not found, the message "The character string could not be found." is displayed.

Example where the character string to be replaced was found

Page 104: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 84 -

2.3.4.7 Displaying the top/end of an NC program The top or end of the NC program being edited can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to move the cursor to the top

of the NC program.

4 Press the operation key to move the cursor to the end

of the NC program.

Page 105: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 85 -

2.3.4.8 Entering a coordinate value into an NC program The current absolute coordinate value can be entered into the NC program being edited.

NOTE The playback option is required to enter a

coordinate value into an NC program. Change the CNC operating mode from the

operation status explained in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program" to the following status:

- Teach in Handle mode, or - Teach in JOG mode

Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Move the cursor to a position where a coordinate value is to be

entered.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Program Edit -

Teach in] screen.

5 Select the axis for which a coordinate value is to be entered, then click the <OK> button. The selected coordinate value is inserted into the NC program.

Page 106: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 86 -

2.3.4.9 Stamping the machining time The machining time for an executed NC program can be inserted as a comment into the NC program being edited.

NOTE The option for the machining time stamp function is

required for stamping the machining time. When the machining time is to be stamped for a

program, the program must have been executed at least once since the power to the CNC was turned on.

This function is valid only for a program with an O number.

Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the operation key to display the operation keys.

3 Press the operation key .

If the NC program has already been executed, the machining

time is stamped. If the NC program has not yet been executed, the following message appears:

Page 107: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 87 -

2.3.4.10 Cutting character strings from an NC program Selected character strings can be cut from the NC program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a cutting range.

When using a pointing device such as a mouse, select a cutting range by dragging the pointing device. When using the keyboard, select a cutting range by using the [Shift] key (or [SHIFT] key on the MDI panel) + cursor keys.

↑ The portion displayed in reverse video is selected.

4 Press the operation key , the [Delete] key on the

keyboard, or the [DELETE] key on the MDI panel to cut the selected range.

Page 108: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 88 -

2.3.4.11 Copying character strings from an NC program Selected character strings can be copied from the NC program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a copy range.

When using a pointing device such as a mouse, select a copy range by dragging the pointing device. When using the keyboard, select a copy range by using the [Shift] key (or [SHIFT] key on the MDI panel) + cursor keys.

↑ The portion displayed in reverse video is selected.

4 Press the operation key to copy the selected range.

No change is made to the screen display.

Page 109: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 89 -

2.3.4.12 Pasting character strings to an NC program In the NC program being edited, character strings cut or copied by [Cut] or [Copy] can be pasted at a specified position. Procedure 1 If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Program Edit] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Move the cursor to a position where the data is to be pasted.

4 Press the operation key , the [Insert] key on the

keyboard, or the [INSERT] key on the MDI panel. The character string or character strings obtained by [Cut] or [Copy] are inserted at the cursor position.

Page 110: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 90 -

2.3.5 Editing an MDI Program An MDI program can be edited on Basic Operation Package 2. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [MDI] submenu key. An MDI program can be edited by moving the cursor to a character string to be edited.

WARNING • An MDI program on the CNC cannot be updated

simply by editing the MDI program on this screen. Be sure to send the MDI program to the CNC after editing.

• Before starting the machine to machine a workpiece after sending an MDI program to the CNC, be sure to check that the command values, compensation values, current position, and external signal settings of the MDI program are correct

NOTE To perform MDI program editing, set the following

status: • Operation

- Stopped or paused in MDI mode

Page 111: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 91 -

2.3.5.1 Finding a character string in an MDI program A search can be made for a specified character string in the MDI program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [MDI Program -

Find] screen.

4 Enter a character string to be found, then select a search direction (Up or Down). Click the <OK> button. If the character string is found, the character string is displayed in reverse video. If the character string is not found, the message "Cannot found the word." is displayed.

↑ Example where the specified character string was found

↑ Example where the specified character string could not be found

Page 112: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 92 -

2.3.5.2 Replacing a character string in an MDI program In the MDI program being edited, a specified character string can be found and replaced with another character string. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [MDI Program -

Replace] screen. 4 Enter a character string to be replaced and a replacing character

string, then select a search direction (Up or Down). Click the <OK> button. If the character string to be replaced is found, the character string is converted to the replacing character string, which is displayed in reverse video. If the character string to be replaced is not found, the message "The character string could not be found." is displayed.

↑ Example where the specified character string was found

Page 113: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 93 -

2.3.5.3 Displaying the top/end of an MDI program The top or end of the MDI program being edited can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to move the cursor to the top

of the MDI program.

4 Press the operation key to move the cursor to the end

of the MDI program.

2.3.5.4 Sending an MDI program to the CNC The MDI program being edited can be sent to the CNC. Before executing an MDI program on the CNC after editing the program on Basic Operation Package 2, be sure to send the program to the CNC. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to send the MDI program to

the CNC.

Page 114: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 94 -

2.3.5.5 Cutting character strings from an MDI program Selected character strings can be cut from the MDI program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a cutting range.

When using a pointing device such as a mouse, select a cutting range by dragging the pointing device. When using the keyboard, select a cutting range by using the [Shift] key (or [SHIFT] key on the MDI panel) + cursor keys.

4 Press the operation key , the [Delete] key on the

keyboard, or the [DELETE] key on the MDI panel to cut the selected range.

2.3.5.6 Copying character strings from an MDI program

Selected character strings can be copied from the MDI program being edited. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a copy range.

When using a pointing device such as a mouse, select a copy range by dragging the pointing device. When using the keyboard, select a copy range by using the [Shift] key (or [SHIFT] key on the MDI panel) + cursor keys.

4 Press the operation key to copy the selected range.

No change is made to the screen display.

Page 115: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 95 -

2.3.5.7 Pasting character strings to an MDI program In the MDI program being edited, character strings cut or copied by [Cut] or [Copy] can be pasted at a specified position. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Move the cursor to a position where the data is to be pasted.

4 Press the operation key , the [Insert] key on the

keyboard, or the [INSERT] key on the MDI panel. The character string or character strings obtained by [Cut] or [Copy] are inserted at the cursor position.

Page 116: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 96 -

2.3.5.8 Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program In the MDI program being edited, sequence numbers can be automatically inserted for newly created lines. Procedure 1 If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [MDI Program] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.5, "Editing an MDI Program".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [MDI Program -

Insert Sequence Number] screen.

4 Check the [Insert sequence number] check box then set an initial value and increment. Click the <OK> button.

When you perform a new line operation, a sequence number is automatically inserted.

Explanation The initial values of the [MDI Program - Insert Sequence Number] screen can be set using the following parameters:

Meaning Setting

Enabling automatic insertion No. 0000 bit → 1 Increment No. 3216

Page 117: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 97 -

2.3.6 DNC Schedule Operation In DNC schedule operation, NC programs are prepared on the hard disk of the personal computer, and data such as the names of programs, the order of operation, and the number of repeats is stored on a file called a schedule file beforehand. Then, the NC programs are sent sequentially as scheduled to the CNC from the personal computer according to the start signal of the CNC.

NOTE A schedule file, NC programs, and the folders

storing them must be made readable and writable beforehand after checking their access rights and attributes. If an unpredictable error occurs, the files and folders can be destructed.

To perform a DNC schedule operation, the following parameter needs to be set:

Meaning Setting Selecting HSSB for the I/O device No. 0020 → 15

NOTE • Set CNC parameters to perform a DNC operation

normally. • Enable DNC operation to perform a DNC operation

and to display the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen, the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen, and the [DNC Operation Monitor] screen. For details, see Subsection 2.7.2.1, "Setting a CNC to be connected".

• Before performing a DNC operation, make a setting to meet the environment used. For details, see Section 3.9, "CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION".

Page 118: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 98 -

2.3.6.1 Executing a schedule operation A DNC schedule operation can be performed as described below. Procedure 1 Prepare NC programs for schedule operation on the hard disk of

the personal computer. (See Subsection 2.3.6.2, "NC program for schedule operation".)

2 Create a schedule file on the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen then register the file names of NC programs, the order of operation, and the number of repeats. Alternatively, select an already created schedule file. (See Subsection 2.3.6.3, "Setting a schedule operation".)

NOTE Before starting the machine, be sure to check on

the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen that the file names of NC programs to be used for DNC operation, the order of operation, and the number of repeats are correct.

3 Start the machine.

Afterward, the state of "DNC operation in progress" is set until the state is reset by the CNC.

- Set the MEMORY mode. - Set bit 5 (DNCI signal) of the G43 signal to 1. - Initiate a cycle start.

4 On the [DNC Operation Monitor] screen, monitor the progress of

execution. (See Subsection 2.3.8, "Monitoring the Execution Progress of

DNC Operation".)

NOTE The method of starting a schedule operation varies

from one machine to another. For details, refer to the operator's manual of the machine in use.

Page 119: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 99 -

2.3.6.2 NC program for schedule operation An NC program for DNC operation to be prepared on the hard disk of the personal computer must have the following format: • File name - 4-digit number + extension "TXT" • File format

- The NC program must start with {LF} or %+{LF}. - The program portion may not start with a program number

or may include a binary code. - If a miscellaneous function code such as M02 and M03 is

included, such a code can be replaced with a space at all positions except in the last schedule operation program to prevent schedule operation from being stopped halfway. (See Section 3.9, "CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION".)

Example)

{LF} represents a line feed operation (EOB).

%{LF}

:

:

:

%

Page 120: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 100 -

2.3.6.3 Setting a schedule operation Settings can be made for a DNC schedule operation. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [DNC SCHEDUL] submenu key.

NOTE During DNC operation, the schedule setting screen

cannot be operated.

Page 121: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 101 -

2.3.6.4 Creating a schedule file A schedule file for setting the file names of NC programs to be used for DNC schedule operation, the order of operation, and the number of repeats can be created. Procedure 1 If the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.6.3, "Setting a schedule operation".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [DNC Schedule

Setting - File] screen.

4 Enter a desired new schedule file name in "File Name:(N):" then press the <Open(O)> button.

↑The screen above is displayed.

5 Click the <OK> button to create a schedule file.

Page 122: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 102 -

6 Press the operation key to display the [DNC Schedule

Setting - Add Program] screen.

7 Select an NC program to be used for schedule operation then click the <Open(O)> button.

The NC program is added to the schedule file.

8 Display the order of the NC program in reverse video.

Page 123: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 103 -

9 Press the operation key to display the [DNC Schedule

Setting - Repeat Count] screen.

10 Enter the number of operation repeats then click the <OK> button.

NOTE If 0 is entered in Repeat Count, the NC program is

not executed. If a negative value is entered in Repeat Count, the NC program is executed endlessly. ([Req. repeat] in the program list indicates "Loop".)

11 Repeat steps 5 through 8 to create a schedule file.

12 To delete an unnecessary NC program, if any, display the corresponding Order value in reverse video then press the

operation key .

Page 124: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 104 -

2.3.6.5 Opening an existing schedule file A schedule file created previously can be opened. Procedure 1 If the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.6.3, "Setting a schedule operation".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [DNC Schedule

Setting - File] screen.

4 Select a schedule file then click the <Open(O)> button. 5 Edit the schedule file as required.

For the method of edition, see Subsection 2.3.6.4, "Creating a schedule file".

Page 125: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 105 -

2.3.6.6 Saving a schedule file under an alias The currently open schedule file can be saved under an alias. Procedure 1 If the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen as described in Subsection 2.3.6.3, "Setting a schedule operation".

2 Open a desired schedule file according to the method described in Subsection 2.3.6.5, "Opening an existing schedule file".

3 Press the operation key to display the [DNC Schedule

Setting - Save as] screen.

4 Enter a desired new file name in "File Name:(N):" then click the <Save(S)> button.

Page 126: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 106 -

2.3.7 DNC Subprogram Call Operation In DNC subprogram call operation, a main program is prepared on the CNC, and NC programs to be called as subprograms are prepared on the personal computer. When the subprogram call block M198Pxxxx is executed in memory operation on the CNC, the subprogram xxxx.TXT is sent from the personal computer to the CNC.

NOTE NC programs and the folder storing them must be

made readable and writable beforehand after checking their access rights and attributes. If an unpredictable error occurs, the files and folder can be destructed.

To perform a DNC subprogram call operation, the following parameters need to be set:

Meaning Setting Selecting HSSB for the I/O device No. 0020 → 15 Number of M code digits No. 3030 → 1 to 8

NOTE • Set CNC parameters to perform a DNC operation

normally. • Enable DNC operation to perform a DNC operation

and to display the [DNC Schedule Setting] screen, the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen, and the [DNC Operation Monitor] screen. For details, see Subsection 2.7.2.1, "Setting a CNC to be connected".

• Before performing a DNC operation, make a setting to meet the environment used. For details, see Section 3.9, "CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION".

Page 127: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 107 -

2.3.7.1 Executing a subprogram call operation A DNC subprogram call operation can be performed as described below. Procedure 1 Prepare NC programs for subprogram call operation on the hard

disk of the personal computer. 2 (See Subsection 2.3.7.2, "NC program for subprogram call

operation".) 3 On the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen, select the folder

storing NC programs to be used for a subprogram call operation. (See Subsection 2.3.7.3, "Specifying a folder storing subprograms".)

NOTE Before starting the machine, be sure to check on

the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen that information about the subprograms to be called from the main program is displayed.

4 Start the machine.

Afterward, the state of "DNC operation in progress" is set until the state is reset by the CNC. <1> Set the MEMORY mode. <2> Set bit 5 (DNCI signal) of the G43 signal to 0. <3> Initiate a cycle start.

NOTE The method of starting a subprogram call operation

varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the operator's manual of the machine in use.

5 On the [DNC Operation Monitor] screen, monitor the progress of

execution. (See Subsection 2.3.8, "Monitoring the Execution Progress of DNC Operation".)

Page 128: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 108 -

2.3.7.2 NC program for subprogram call operation An NC program for subprogram call operation to be prepared on the hard disk of the personal computer must have the following format: • File name - 4-digit number + extension "TXT"

• File format - The NC program must start with %+{LF}. - The body of the NC program must start with the same

program number as the file name (for example, O1234 or O12345678).

- The NC program must end with M99+{LF}+%. - The main body of the NC program may include a binary

code. Example)

{LF} represents a line feed operation (EOB).

%{LF}

O0001(COMMENT){LF}

:

:

M99{LF}

%

Page 129: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 109 -

2.3.7.3 Specifying a folder storing subprograms The folder storing NC programs to be used for a DNC subprogram call operation can be specified. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [DNC SUBPRG] submenu key.

NOTE During DNC operation, the [DNC Sub Program

Call Setting] screen cannot be operated. Procedure 1 If the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen is currently not

displayed, display the [DNC Sub Program Call Setting] screen by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [DNC SUBPRG] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

Page 130: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 110 -

3 Press the operation key to display the [DNC

Subprogram Call - Folder Setting] screen.

4 Select a folder storing NC programs then click the <OK> button. A list of the files with the extension TXT stored in the specified

folder is displayed.

Page 131: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 111 -

2.3.8 Monitoring the Execution Progress of DNC Operation After a DNC schedule operation or DNC subprogram call operation is started, the execution progress of DNC operation can be checked on the [DNC Operation Monitor] screen. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM] function key and [DNC MONITOR] submenu key.

↑ Example of DNC schedule operation being monitored

↑ Example of DNC subprogram call operation being monitored

Page 132: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 112 -

Explanation • Display data

- Operating mode The mode of automatic operation is indicated.

Indication Meaning DNC Indicates that the DNC operation mode is

set. MEMORY Indicates that the MEMORY operation

mode of the CNC is set.

- Status The state of automatic operation is indicated.

Indication Meaning Stopped Indicates that the CNC is stopped. Schedule Indicates that a DNC schedule operation

is in progress. Sub program call Indicates that a DNC subprogram call

operation is in progress. (No indication) Indicates that a state other than the

above is set.

- Selected schedule file In a DNC schedule operation, the currently selected

schedule file is indicated. - Execution file In a DNC schedule operation, the file name of the NC

program being executed and its order of operation are indicated.

In a DNC subprogram call operation, only the file name of the NC program being executed is indicated.

- Program progress The ratio of transfer of the NC program being executed is

indicated. - Program (main number and sub-number) On the main side, the number of the main program currently

being executed is indicated. On the sub-side, the number of the subprogram currently being executed is indicated.

- Source On the main side, the location of the main program

currently being executed is indicated. On the sub-side, the location of the subprogram currently being executed is indicated. Indication Meaning

NC Indicates that the program currently being executed exists on the program memory of the CNC.

PC Indicates that the program currently being executed exists on the hard disk of the personal computer.

Page 133: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 113 -

- Schedule In a DNC schedule operation, a list of the NC programs

registered in the schedule file and their transfer statuses are displayed. If "Loop" is indicated in Req. repeat, "-" is indicated when the repeat count exceeds 9999.

NOTE • The execution progress status displayed on the

[DNC Operation Monitor] screen does not represent the execution progress status of DNC operation on the CNC, but represents the status of NC program transfer by Basic Operation Package 2 to the CNC.

• When all NC programs have been transferred to the buffer of the CNC, the operating mode indication switches from "DNC" to "MEMORY", and the source indication switches from "PC" to "NC" even though DNC operation is still in progress on the CNC side.

• The indications of a main program number, subprogram number, and source represent information obtained by estimation from the states of the CNC and Basic Operation Package 2, and do not always represent correct values.

Page 134: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 114 -

2.4 SETTING This section describes how to set various types of data.

2.4.1 Setting of Settings Settings such as "TV check" and "Punch code" can be set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [HANDY] submenu key.

NOTE To set settings, set the following status:

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Stopped or paused in MDI mode

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 135: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 115 -

On this screen, the following data items can be set:

Name Description Parameter write Specify whether to enable parameter write.

When the check box is checked, parameter write is enabled.

TV check Specify whether to execute a TV check. When the check box is checked, a TV check is executed.

Sequence number Specify whether to insert sequence numbers automatically when the program is edited in the EDIT mode. When the check box is checked, sequence numbers are automatically inserted.

Punch code Specify the data code output by the CNC using the reader/punch interface.

Input unit Specify the input unit (millimeters or inches). Tape format Specify whether to perform conversion to the

FS15 tape format. I/O channel Specify the channel number of the

reader/punch interface. For details of the channel numbers that can be specified, see the parameter manual for the CNC being used.

Sequence number comparison and stop

To execute a sequence number comparison and stop operation, specify a desired sequence number.

Program number comparison and stop

To execute a program number comparison and stop operation, specify a desired NC program number.

Mirror image Specify whether to set mirror image on or off for each axis.

NOTE The channel number of the reader/punch

interface set on this screen is for the input/output device on the CNC side.

Basic Operation Package 2 cannot control the input/output device connected to the CNC side.

Page 136: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 116 -

Procedure 1 If the [Handy] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Handy] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [HANDY] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an item to be set. 4 The value of a data item of check box type can be changed by

pressing the operation key or , or by using

the space bar on the keyboard. 5 For a data item of radio button type (data for which one of

options is to be selected), a value can be selected by moving the cursor.

6 For a data item for which a numeric value is to be set, enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Press the operation key , the [Enter] key on the

keyboard, or the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

Press the operation key , the [Esc] key on the keyboard,

or the [CAN] key on the MDI panel to cancel the input.

Page 137: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 117 -

2.4.2 Setting Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer Data items such as operating time, required parts, and timer can be set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [TIMER] submenu key.

NOTE To set the operating time, parts count, and timer,

set the following status: • Operation

- Emergency stop, or - Stopped or paused in MDI mode

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 138: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 118 -

On this screen, the following data items can be displayed and set:

Name Description Parts total Indicates a cumulative value counted when M02,

M30, or another M code specified in a parameter is executed. This field of the screen provides an indication only and does not allow a value to be set. Use a parameter to change an indicated value.

Parts required Specify the number of parts required. When zero is set, the number of parts is assumed to be infinite. A value can also be set by a parameter.

Parts count Indicates a cumulative value counted when M02, M30, or another M code specified in a parameter is executed. A value can also be set by a parameter.

Power on Indicates a cumulative power-on period. This field of the screen provides an indication only and does not allow a value to be set. Use a parameter to change an indicated value.

Operating time Indicates a cumulative operating period during automatic operation (excluding the period during which the operation is stopped or paused). Use a parameter to change an indicated value.

Cutting time Indicates a cumulative cutting period by linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), and other cutting feed. Use a parameter to change an indicated value.

Free purpose This field can be used to indicate the cumulative period of a specified task such as a coolant-on period. The meaning of an indicated value varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Cycle time Indicates the cumulative operating time during a single cycle of automatic operation (excluding the period during which the operation is stopped or paused). When a cycle is started from the reset state, the indicated value is automatically reset to 0. The value is also reset to 0 when the power is shut down.

Current time Date and time set with the CNC. This data item can also be set by a parameter.

For details of the parameters related to the above, refer to the parameter manual of each CNC.

NOTE No negative values may be set in the Parts and

Timer sections. In the M and S fields of the Timer section, a value ranging from 0 to 59 can be specified.

Page 139: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 119 -

Procedure 1 If the [Timer] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Timer] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [TIMER] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an item to be set. 4 Enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Press the operation key , the [Enter] key on the

keyboard, or the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

Press the operation key , the [Esc] key on the keyboard,

or the [CAN] key on the MDI panel to cancel the input.

Page 140: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 120 -

2.4.3 Setting Tool Offset Tool offset values can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [OFFSET] submenu key. The type of offset value that can be set depends on the CNC option. For details, refer to the operator's manual of the CNC.

WARNING An invalid tool offset setting may result in

unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders. Set an appropriate tool offset value for the machining program.

NOTE To set a tool offset value, set the following status:

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 141: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 121 -

Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [OFFSET] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a tool offset data item to be set. 4 Enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

To enter an increment, see Subsection 2.4.3.3, "Entering an increment for tool offset data". To enter a relative coordinate value, see Subsection 2.4.3.4, "Entering a counter value for tool offset data". To enter a measured value on the lathe system, see Subsection 2.4.3.5, "Entering a measured value for tool offset data".

Page 142: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 122 -

2.4.3.1 Switching the type of tool offset data A type of tool offset data to be set and displayed can be selected. Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a type of tool offset data by pressing the operation key

or when using the lathe system, or the

operation key or when using the machining

center system.

NOTE The selectable types of data differ between the

lathe system and the machining center system: - Lathe system: Geometry and wear - Machining center system: Tool length and

tool radius

Depending on the CNC option, these soft keys may not be displayed.

Page 143: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 123 -

2.4.3.2 Finding a tool offset data number The tool offset data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Tool Offset -

Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The

tool offset data of the specified number is displayed, and the cursor moves to the data.

Page 144: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 124 -

2.4.3.3 Entering an increment for tool offset data An increment can be entered for tool offset data. Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select tool offset data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Tool Offset -

+Input] screen.

5 Enter an incremental value (increment) then click the <OK> button. The value obtained by adding the entered increment to the current value is set.

Page 145: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 125 -

2.4.3.4 Entering a counter value for tool offset data A coordinate value displayed on the [Relative] screen can be set for tool offset data. Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select tool offset data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Tool Offset -

C.Input] screen.

5 Select an axis for a relative coordinate value to be set, then click the <OK> button. The value of the selected tool offset data is set.

NOTE When the lathe system is used, the relative

coordinate value on an axis selected on the [Tool Offset - C.Input] screen is set as the tool offset data at the cursor position. If a relative coordinate value is entered as a geometry offset value when the machining center system is used, the following is set: Geometry offset value = Relative coordinate value Wear offset value = 0 If a relative coordinate value is entered as a wear offset value when the machining center system is used, the following is set: Geometry offset value = No change Wear offset value = Relative coordinate value - Geometry offset value

Page 146: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 126 -

2.4.3.5 Entering a measured value for tool offset data

NOTE The function for entering a measured value is

supported only for lathe systems. Tool offset data can be set based on a measured value. The following value is set as a tool offset value: Tool offset value = Absolute coordinate value - Measured

value If a measured value is entered to set a geometry offset value, the following is set: Geometry offset value = Absolute coordinate value -

Measured value Wear offset value = 0 If a measured value is entered to set a wear offset value, the following is set: Geometry offset value = No change Wear offset value = (Absolute coordinate value - Measured

value) - Geometry offset value Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select tool offset data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Tool Offset -

Measure] screen.

5 Select an axis for which a measured value is to be entered, and

enter a measured value. Then click the <OK> button. The measured value is set for tool offset data.

Page 147: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 127 -

2.4.3.6 Clearing all tool offset data to zero All set tool offset data can be cleared to 0.

NOTE This command is valid when bit 4 of parameter

No. 3205 is set to 0. Procedure 1 If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Tool Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Tool Offset -

Clear] screen.

↑When a distinction is made between geometry offset and wear offset

↑In cases other than the above

4 Click the <OK> button. All selected tool offset data is cleared

to zero.

Page 148: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 128 -

2.4.4 Setting a Custom Macro Variable The value of a custom macro variable can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [MACRO] submenu key.

WARNING Incorrect use or setting of a custom macro variable

may result in unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders. Set custom macro variable values that are appropriate for the machining program.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE To set a custom macro variable, the

corresponding CNC option is required. Moreover, set the following status:

• Protect key

- Released For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Three types of custom macro variables are used:

Type of variable

Variable range Description

Local variable

#1 to #33 Custom macro variables of this type cannot be set but can be only displayed on this screen.

Common variable 1

#100 to #199 (*1)

Custom macro variables of this type can be displayed and set on this screen. The values of custom macro variables of this type are cleared when the power is turned off.

Common variable 2

#500 to #999 (*1)

Custom macro variables of this type can be displayed and set on this screen. The values of custom macro variables of this type are preserved when the power is turned off.

*1 The actually usable range depends on the CNC option.

Page 149: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 129 -

Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [MACRO] submenu key.

2 Select data to be set. 3 Enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Press the [Enter] key on the keyboard, or the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC. Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard, or the [CAN] key on the MDI panel to cancel the input. To enter an increment, see Subsection 2.4.4.3, "Entering an increment for a custom macro variable". To enter a relative coordinate value, see Subsection 2.4.4.4, "Entering a counter value for a custom macro variable".

Page 150: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 130 -

2.4.4.1 Switching the type of custom macro variable A type of custom macro variables to be displayed and set can be selected. Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key , , or to

select a desired display screen.

Page 151: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 131 -

2.4.4.2 Finding a custom macro variable number The custom macro variable of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Custom Macro

- Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The

custom macro variable of the specified number is displayed, and the cursor moves to the custom macro variable.

NOTE Only the currently displayed type and range of

custom macro variables can be searched.

Page 152: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 132 -

2.4.4.3 Entering an increment for a custom macro variable An increment can be entered for the value of a custom macro variable. Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a custom macro variable to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Custom Macro

- +Input] screen.

5 Enter an incremental value (increment) then click the <OK> button. The value obtained by adding the entered increment to the current value is set.

Page 153: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 133 -

2.4.4.4 Entering a counter value for a custom macro variable A coordinate value displayed on the [Relative] screen can be set for the value of a custom macro variable. Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a custom macro variable to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Custom Macro

- C.Input] screen.

5 Select an axis for a relative coordinate value to be set, then click the <OK> button. The value of the selected custom macro variable is set.

Page 154: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 134 -

2.4.4.5 Clearing all custom macro variables to zero All custom macro variables of the type currently displayed are cleared to zero. Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Custom Macro

- Clear] screen.

4 Click the <Yes> button. All custom macro variables of the type currently displayed are cleared to zero.

2.4.4.6 Making a custom macro variable empty

A selected custom macro variable can be made empty (state where no value is defined). Procedure 1 If the [Custom Macro] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Custom Macro] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a custom macro variable to be made empty.

4 Press the operation key . The selected custom macro

variable is made empty.

Page 155: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 135 -

2.4.5 Setting Workpiece Origin Offset A workpiece origin offset value can be set based on the position of the workpiece origin viewed from the machine zero point. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [WORK OFS] submenu key.

WARNING Setting incorrect workpiece origin offset data may

result in unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders. Set workpiece origin offset data that is appropriate for the machining program.

NOTE To set workpiece origin offset data, the

corresponding CNC option is required. Moreover, set the following status:

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 156: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 136 -

Procedure 1 If the [Work Zero Offset] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [Work Zero Offset] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [WORK OFS] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select workpiece origin offset data to be set. 4 Enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

To enter a measured value, see Subsection 2.4.5.2, "Entering a measured value for workpiece origin offset data". To enter an increment, see Subsection 2.4.5.3, "Entering an increment for workpiece origin offset data".

Page 157: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 137 -

2.4.5.1 Finding a workpiece origin offset data number The workpiece origin offset data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Work Zero Offset] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [Work Zero Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.5, "Setting Workpiece Origin Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Work Zero

Offset - Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The

cursor moves to the workpiece origin offset data of the specified number.

Page 158: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 138 -

2.4.5.2 Entering a measured value for workpiece origin offset data Workpiece origin offset data can be set based on a measured value. The following value is set as a workpiece origin offset value: Workpiece origin offset value = Machine coordinate value -

Measured value Procedure 1 If the [Work Zero Offset] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [Work Zero Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.5, "Setting Workpiece Origin Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select workpiece origin offset data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Work Zero

Offset - Measure] screen.

5 Select an axis for which a measured value is to be entered, and

enter a measured value. Then click the <OK> button. The measured value is set for workpiece origin offset data.

Page 159: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 139 -

2.4.5.3 Entering an increment for workpiece origin offset data An increment can be entered for workpiece origin offset data. Procedure 1 If the [Work Zero Offset] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [Work Zero Offset] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.5, "Setting Workpiece Origin Offset".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select workpiece origin offset data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Work Zero

Offset - +Input] screen.

5 Enter an incremental value (increment) then click the <OK> button. The value obtained by adding the entered increment to the current value is set.

Page 160: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 140 -

2.4.6 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System Shift A workpiece coordinate system shift value can be set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [W.Shift] submenu key.

WARNING Setting an incorrect workpiece coordinate system

shift value may result in unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders. Set a workpiece coordinate system shift value that is appropriate for the machining program.

NOTE The workpiece coordinate system shift function is

supported only for lathe systems. To make a workpiece coordinate system shift setting, set the following status:

• Protect key

- Released • Parameter

- Bit 6 of No. 1201 = 0 For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 161: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 141 -

• [Relative] and [Absolute] screens Relative position and absolute position data is displayed. For operation, see Section 2.2, "POSITION DISPLAY".

Procedure 1 If the [Work Shift] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Work Shift] screen by pressing the [SETTING] function key and [W.Shift] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a workpiece coordinate system shift to be set. 4 Enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

To specify a shift value directly, set the desired value in "Shift value". To specify a shift value indirectly from a measured value, set a measured distance from the coordinate system origin in "Measurement". A displacement from the set coordinate system origin is calculated, and a shift value is set accordingly. To enter an increment, see Subsection 2.4.6.1, "Entering an increment for workpiece coordinate system shift data".

Page 162: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 142 -

2.4.6.1 Entering an increment for workpiece coordinate system shift data

An increment can be entered for a workpiece coordinate system shift value. Procedure 1 If the [Work Shift] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Work Shift] screen as described in Subsection 2.4.6, "Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System Shift".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a workpiece coordinate system shift to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Work Shift -

+Input] screen.

5 Enter an incremental value (increment) then click the <OK> button. The value obtained by adding the entered increment to the current value is set.

Page 163: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 143 -

2.5 SYSTEM This section describes how to display and set system-related information, and how to input and output different types of data.

2.5.1 Displaying Parameters The values of parameters for defining the machine specifications and functions can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PARAM] submenu key.

NOTE The data of displayed parameters varies from one

machine to another. For the correspondence between the numbers and data, refer to the parameter table prepared by the machine tool builder.

Page 164: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 144 -

Procedure 1 If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Parameter] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PARAM] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

a) By pressing the operation key or , the

[PageUp] or [PageDown] key on the keyboard, or the [↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel, select a page to be displayed.

b) By pressing the operation key or , or the

[↑] or [↓] (cursor) key on the keyboard or MDI panel, select a desired item.

c) For a parameter of bit type (for which the check box is turned on or off), select a bit by pressing the operation key

or , or the [←] or [→] key on the

keyboard or MDI panel. For parameter setting, see Subsection 2.5.1.2, "Setting parameters".

Page 165: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 145 -

2.5.1.1 Finding a parameter number The parameter of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Parameter] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.1, "Displaying Parameters".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Parameter -

Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a parameter number to be found, then click the <OK> button.

NOTE If the parameter of a specified number is not found,

the parameter of the greatest number under the specified number is displayed.

Page 166: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 146 -

2.5.1.2 Setting parameters A parameter can be set.

NOTE To set a parameter, set the following status:

• Setting - Enable Parameter Write.

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Stopped or paused in MDI mode

For the method of setting of settings, see Subsection 2.4.1, "Setting of Settings" or Subsection 2.5.1.3, "Enabling parameter write".

Procedure 1 If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Parameter] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.1, "Displaying Parameters".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select an item to be set. 4 When setting a data item for which a numeric value is to be set,

enter a desired value through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Press the operation key or the [Enter] key on the

keyboard, or click the [INPUT] button on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

Press the operation key or the [Esc] key on the

keyboard, or click the [CAN] button on the MDI panel to cancel the input.

5 The value of a data item of bit type (for which the check box is turned on or off) can be changed by pressing the operation key

or or by pressing the space key on the

keyboard.

Page 167: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 147 -

2.5.1.3 Enabling parameter write Whether to enable the setting "Parameter Write" can be set. This setting is also referred to as PWE (Parameter Write Enabled).

NOTE To enable parameter write, set the following status:

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Stopped or paused in MDI mode

Procedure 1 If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Parameter] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.1, "Displaying Parameters".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 When the operation key is displayed to indicate that

PWE is off, the "Parameter Write" is currently enabled. Pressing this key disables parameter write.

4 When the operation key is displayed to indicate that

PWE is on, "Parameter Write" is currently disabled. Pressing this operation key enables parameter write.

Page 168: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 148 -

2.5.2 Displaying the Diagnosis Screen Diagnostic data indicating machine state can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [DIAG] submenu key.

Procedure 1 If the [Diagnosis] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Diagnosis] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [DIAG] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

a) By pressing the operation key or , the

[PageUp] or [PageDown] key on the keyboard, or the [↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel, select a page to be displayed.

b) By pressing the operation key or , or the

[↑] or [↓] key on the keyboard or MDI panel, scroll the screen display one line at a time.

Page 169: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 149 -

2.5.2.1 Finding a diagnostic data number The diagnostic data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Diagnosis] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Diagnosis] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.2, "Displaying the Diagnosis Screen".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Diagnosis -

Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a diagnostic data number to be found, then click the <OK> button.

NOTE If the diagnostic data of a specified number is not

found, the diagnostic data of the greatest number under the specified number is displayed.

Page 170: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 150 -

2.5.3 Displaying the System Configuration The following system configuration data can be displayed.

Name Description Hardware Hardware names, ID-1, ID-2, and slot numbers are displayed.Software Information about the control software of the system and

added software is displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [CONFIG] submenu key.

Page 171: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 151 -

2.5.3.1 Outputting system configuration data to a file System configuration data can be output in text format to a file. Procedure 1 If the [System Configuration] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [System Configuration] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.3, "Displaying the System Configuration".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [System

Configuration - Write to Disk] screen.

4 Specify a save location and file name then click the <Save(S)> button.

Page 172: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 152 -

2.5.4 Inputting/Outputting Data Various data items can be transferred between the CNC and Basic Operation Package 2. Moreover, a data file can be deleted or renamed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [DATA IO] submenu key.

The following types of data can be input/output:

- NC program - Tool offset data - Parameter - Pitch error compensation data - Custom macro variable (common variable only)

On the left side of the screen, the currently selected type of input/output data, channel, and remaining size (in KB) of the connection destination are displayed. On the right side of the screen, a list of data files present at the connection destination is displayed. If NC program is selected as type of data, a list of NC programs is displayed in the lower-left area of the screen.

Page 173: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 153 -

2.5.4.1 Setting parameters for input/output Parameters for input/output of various types of data can be set. Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the operation key to display the [Data I/O -

Setting] screen.

3 Set the following data:

• Folder - Path Set the path where a data file used for input/output is

placed. When changing the path, select a desired path by clicking the button.

- Type of file When "Extension" is selected, a file extension can be

set in the text box. When an extension is set, the list of data files displays only those files that have the set extension. If no extension is specified for the name of a file to be output according to Subsection 2.5.4.4, "Outputting various types of data", an extension set here is automatically assigned.

• NC Program Folder - CNC folder Set a folder on the CNC side used for input/output.

When changing the folder, select a desired folder by clicking the button.

Page 174: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 154 -

• I/O data - TV check A blank code for TV check is inserted into the data

block. When this item is checked, TV check is enabled.

- CTV CTV is enabled when TV check is turned on.

When this item is checked, TV check in a comment is canceled.

Page 175: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 155 -

2.5.4.2 Displaying a list of various types of data files A list of various types of data files can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder to be listed, as necessary.

For details, see Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

4 Press the operation key .

An updated list of data files is displayed.

When NC program is selected as type of data, a list of NC

programs is also displayed as indicated below.

Press the operation key . The list of NC program is

also refreshed.

A displayed list of NC programs includes the NC programs held in an NC program folder set as described in Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

Page 176: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 156 -

2.5.4.3 Entering various types of data Various types of data can be input from files. The input of data means the transfer of data from Basic Operation Package 2 to the CNC.

WARNING • Before starting the machine to machine a

workpiece after input of data (NC programs, tool offset data, custom macro variables, and parameters), be sure to check that the command values, compensation values, current position, and external signal settings of the NC program are correct.

• If an error is made in the input data type (for example, macro variable data is entered as parameter data), the subsequent operation will be unpredictable.

If an error is made in the input data type, delete all

the data entered at that time, then reenter all the required data.

NOTE To enter data, place the CNC in the same state as

for setting input data on the screen. For details, see the following subsections:

- Input of an NC program Subsection 2.3.4, "Editing an NC Program"

- Input of tool offset data Subsection 2.4.3, "Setting Tool Offset"

- Input of a custom macro variable Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting a Custom Macro Variable"

- Input of a parameter Subsection 2.5.1.2, "Setting parameters"

- Input of pitch error compensation data Subsection 2.5.5, "Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data"

Page 177: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 157 -

Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Set a folder to be displayed as a list and make a setting related to

TV check as necessary. For details, see Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

4 Select an input data type from the following: - NC program - Tool offset data - Parameter - Pitch error compensation data - Custom macro variable

Ensure that the data type selected here matches the contents of a

data file specified in step 5.

5 From the list of data files, select a data file to be entered.

NOTE To update the list of data files, press the [Refresh]

operation key.

6 Press the operation key .

For input of an NC program, the screen shown below is displayed.

Enter a desired new program name then click the <OK> button. The input of data is started.

For input of data other than an NC program, the screen above is

not displayed, but direct data input to the CNC is started.

Page 178: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 158 -

7 Upon completion of input, the screen shown below is displayed.

NOTE • When the parameters output from a CNC are to be

entered into another CNC, ensure in advance that the number of axes, option selection states, and parameters match. For the CNC parameter for the number of axes, refer to the manual of each CNC. For the setting of parameters, see Subsection 2.5.1, "Displaying Parameters".

• Some CNC parameters are protected. Such parameters cannot be modified.

Page 179: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 159 -

2.5.4.4 Outputting various types of data Various types of data can be output to files. The output of data means the transfer of data from the CNC to Basic Operation Package 2. Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Set a folder to be displayed as a list and make a setting related to

TV check as necessary. For details, see Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

4 Select an output data type from the following: - NC program - Tool offset data - Parameter - Pitch error compensation data - Custom macro variable

5 For output of an NC program, select a desired program from the list of NC programs.

6 Press the operation key to display the [Data I/O -

Punch] screen.

7 Enter the name of an output destination file then click the <OK> button. The output of data is started.

Page 180: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 160 -

8 Upon completion of output, the screen shown below is displayed.

NOTE If an existing output file name is specified, a screen

is displayed to check whether you allow the existing file to be overwritten. If you do not allow the existing file to be overwritten, the output operation is stopped.

Page 181: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 161 -

2.5.4.5 Deleting various types of data files Various types of data files can be deleted. Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder to be listed, as necessary.

For details, see Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

4 Select a file to be deleted on the list. Multiple files can be selected as indicated below.

NOTE To update the list of data files, press the [Refresh]

operation key.

5 Press the operation key to display the [Data I/O - File

Delete] screen.

Page 182: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 162 -

6 Click the <OK> button. All of the selected files are deleted.

NOTE This function cannot delete an NC program on the

CNC.

Page 183: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 163 -

2.5.4.6 Renaming various data files Various data files can be renamed. Procedure 1 If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Data I/O] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.4, "Inputting/Outputting Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select a folder to be displayed as a list, as necessary.

For details, see Subsection 2.5.4.1, "Setting parameters for input/output".

4 Select a file to be renamed on the list.

5 Press the operation key to display the [Data I/O - File

Rename] screen.

6 Enter a desired new file name then click the <OK> button.

NOTE This function cannot rename an NC program.

Page 184: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 164 -

2.5.5 Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data Pitch error compensation data can be set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PITCH] submenu key.

WARNING Pitch error compensation data is set to match the

characteristics of the machine connected to the CNC. The pitch error compensation data varies with the machine; so modifying this data may degrade the precision of the machine. In general, the end user must not attempt to modify the pitch error compensation data. To set pitch error compensation data, set the following status:

• Setting - Enable Parameter Write.

• Operation - Emergency stop

For an explanation of how to specify settings, see

Subsection 2.4.1, "Setting of Settings".

Procedure 1 If the [Pitch] screen is currently not displayed, display [Pitch]

screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PITCH] submenu key.

2 Move the cursor to the field where a value is to be set. 3 Enter a value to be set through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Page 185: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 165 -

2.5.5.1 Finding a pitch error compensation data number The pitch error compensation data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [Pitch] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Pitch]

screen as described in Subsection 2.5.5, "Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Pitch - Number

Search] screen.

4 Enter a parameter number to be found, then click the <OK>

button. The cursor moves to the pitch error compensation data of the specified number.

Page 186: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 166 -

2.5.5.2 Entering an increment for pitch error compensation data An increment can be entered for pitch error compensation data. Procedure 1 If the [Pitch] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Pitch]

screen as described in Subsection 2.5.5, "Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 Select pitch error compensation data to be set.

4 Press the operation key to display the [Pitch - +Input]

screen.

5 Enter an incremental value (increment) then click the <OK> button. The value obtained by adding the entered increment to the current value is set.

Page 187: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 167 -

2.5.6 Displaying PMC Status PMC status can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Status] submenu key. The screen displays PMC addresses and their statuses. A signal displayed in green is active.

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Status] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Status] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Status] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 PMC parameters can be displayed by using one of the following

methods: a) The screen display can be moved by pressing the operation

key or , or the [↑] or [↓] key on the

keyboard or MDI panel. b) The screen display can be moved by pressing the operation

key or , the [PageUp] or [PageDown]

key on the keyboard, or the [↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel.

Page 188: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 168 -

c) Select a bit by pressing the operation key or

, or the [←] or [→] key on the keyboard or MDI

panel.

2.5.6.1 Finding a PMC status address The PMC status at a specified address can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Status] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Status] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.6, "Displaying PMC Status".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Status -

Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The

cursor moves to the PMC status data of the specified number. To specify a number to be found, enter "address + number" (for example, G1234). If no address is entered, a number search is made in the currently displayed address range.

NOTE If the PMC parameter of a specified number is not

found, the parameter of the greatest number under the specified number is displayed.

Page 189: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 169 -

2.5.6.2 Displaying PMC status data in decimal or hexadecimal PMC status data display can be switched between decimal display and hexadecimal display. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Status] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Status] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.6, "Displaying PMC Status".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 (To switch from hexadecimal display to decimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to decimal display.

(To switch from decimal display to hexadecimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to hexadecimal

display.

Page 190: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 170 -

2.5.6.3 Switching among PMC status paths The display target PMC path can be switched.

NOTE This function is enabled when multiple PMC paths

are used. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Status] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Status] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.6, "Displaying PMC Status".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Each time you press the operation key , the target PMC

path is switched and the [PMC Status] screen is updated.

The PMC path is switched in the following order: 1. First PMC 2. Second PMC 3. Third PMC 4. Dual check safety

(only when the function is added)

Page 191: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 171 -

2.5.7 Displaying PMC Alarms The alarms issued from all PMC paths can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Alarm] submenu key. For the meaning of each PMC alarm message, refer to the operator's manual of each PMC.

Page 192: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 172 -

2.5.8 Setting a PMC Counter The value of a PMC counter can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Counter] submenu key. • PMC counter The address, preset value, and current value of a PMC counter

are displayed. Set a value as required.

NOTE To set a PMC counter, set the following status:

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Stopped or paused in MDI mode

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Counter] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [PMC Counter] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Counter] submenu key.

2 Move the cursor to the field where a value is to be set. 3 Enter a value to be set through the keyboard or MDI panel.

Page 193: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 173 -

2.5.8.1 Finding a PMC counter number The PMC counter data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Counter] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [PMC Counter] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.8, "Setting a PMC Counter".

2 Press the display/operation switching key on the [PMC

Counter] screen to display the operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Counter -

Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The

PMC counter data of the specified number is displayed, and the cursor moves to the preset field.

Page 194: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 174 -

2.5.8.2 Switching among PMC counter paths The display/setting target PMC path can be switched.

NOTE This function is enabled when multiple PMC paths

are used. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Counter] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [PMC Counter] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.8, "Setting a PMC Counter".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Each time you press the operation key , the target PMC

path is switched and the [PMC Counter] screen is updated.

The PMC path is switched in the following order: 1. First PMC 2. Second PMC 3. Third PMC 4. Dual check safety

(only when the function is added)

Page 195: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 175 -

2.5.9 Setting a PMC Timer The value of a PMC timer can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Timer] submenu key. • PMC timer The address, timer value, and accuracy of a PMC timer are

displayed. Set a value as required.

NOTE To set a PMC timer, set the following status:

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Reset in MDI mode

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Timer] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Timer] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Timer] submenu key.

2 Move the cursor to the field where a value is to be set. 3 Enter a value to be set through the keyboard or MDI panel. Depending on the accuracy set for each address, the value that

can be displayed/set varies as described below.

a) (When the accuracy is "1") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 1 millisecond.

Page 196: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 176 -

b) (When the accuracy is "10") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 10

milliseconds. When the specified value is not a multiple of 10, the value

is rounded to the next lower multiple of 10. c) (When the accuracy is "100") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 100

milliseconds. When the specified value is not a multiple of 100, the value

is rounded to the next lower multiple of 100. d) (When the accuracy is "8") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 8

milliseconds. When the specified value is not a multiple of 8, the value is

rounded to the next lower multiple of 8. e) (When the accuracy is "48") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 48

milliseconds. When the specified value is not a multiple of 48, the value

is rounded to the next lower multiple of 48. f) (When the accuracy is "SEC") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 1 second. When the specified value is not a multiple of 1000, the

value is rounded to the next lower multiple of 1000. A number followed by "H", "M", or "S" may be entered. Example: By entering 1H10M30S, you can set 1 hour, 10

minutes, and 30 seconds. g) (When the accuracy is "MIN") A timer value can be displayed/set in steps of 1 minute. When the specified value is not a multiple of 60000, the

value is rounded to the next lower multiple of 60000. A number followed by "H" or "M" may be entered. Example: By entering 2H30M, you can set 2 hours and 30

minutes.

Page 197: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 177 -

2.5.9.1 Finding a PMC timer number The PMC timer data of a specified number can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Timer] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Timer] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.9, "Setting a PMC Timer".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Timer -

Number-Search] screen.

4 Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The cursor moves to the PMC timer data of the specified number.

Page 198: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 178 -

2.5.9.2 Switching among PMC timer paths The display/setting target PMC path can be switched.

NOTE This function is enabled when multiple PMC paths

are used. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Timer] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Timer] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.9, "Setting a PMC Timer".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Each time you press the operation key , the target PMC

path is switched and the [PMC Timer] screen is updated.

4 The PMC path is switched in the following order: 1. First PMC 2. Second PMC 3. Third PMC 4. Dual check safety

(only when the function is added)

Page 199: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 179 -

2.5.10 Displaying a PMC Keep Relay The value of a PMC keep relay can be displayed and set. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Relay] submenu key.

• PMC keep relay An address and its on/off state are displayed. When a check

box is checked, the data is on. Turn on or off data as required. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [PMC Keep Relay] screen by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Relay] submenu key.

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 PMC keep relays can be displayed by using one of the following

methods: a) The screen display can be moved by pressing the operation

key or , or the [↑] or [↓] key on the

keyboard or MDI panel. b) The screen display can be moved by pressing the operation

key or , or the [←] or [→] key on the

keyboard or MDI panel.

Page 200: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 180 -

c) The screen display can be moved by pressing the operation

key or , the [PageUp] or [PageDown]

key on the keyboard, or the [↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel.

2.5.10.1 Finding a PMC keep relay address

The PMC keep relay data of a specified address can be displayed. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [PMC Keep Relay] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.10, "Displaying a PMC Keep Relay".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Keep

Relay - Search] screen.

Enter a number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The cursor moves to the PMC keep relay data of the specified number. To specify a number to be found, enter "address + number" (for example, K1234). A search can be made by not specifying an address but entering a number only.

NOTE If the PMC keep relay of a specified number is not

found, the PMC keep relay of the greatest number under the specified number is displayed.

Page 201: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 181 -

2.5.10.2 Displaying PMC keep relay data in decimal or hexadecimal PMC keep relay data display can be switched between decimal display and hexadecimal display. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [PMC Keep Relay] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.10, "Displaying a PMC Keep Relay".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 (To switch from decimal display to hexadecimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to hexadecimal

display.

(To switch from hexadecimal display to decimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to decimal display.

Page 202: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 182 -

2.5.10.3 Setting a PMC keep relay

NOTE To set a PMC keep relay, set the following status:

• Operation - Emergency stop, or - Reset in MDI mode

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [PMC Keep Relay] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.10, "Displaying a PMC Keep Relay".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys. 3 The data of a check box can be changed by pressing the

operation key or , or by pressing the space

key on the keyboard. To specify numeric data in the right-hand column, move the cursor to the data position then enter a desired value.

Press the operation key or the [Enter] key on the

keyboard, or click the [INPUT] button on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

Press the operation key or the [Esc] key on the

keyboard, or click the [CAN] button on the MDI panel to cancel the input.

NOTE When you attempt to change the value of a system

keep relay, a screen for confirmation is displayed. To change the value, click the <OK> button.

Page 203: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 183 -

2.5.10.4 Switching among PMC keep relay paths The display/setting target PMC path can be switched.

NOTE This function is enabled when multiple PMC paths

are used. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [PMC Keep Relay] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.10, "Displaying a PMC Keep Relay".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Each time you press the operation key , the target PMC

path is switched and the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is updated.

The PMC path is switched in the following order: 1. First PMC 2. Second PMC 3. Third PMC 4. Dual check safety

(only when the function is added)

Page 204: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 184 -

2.5.11 Setting PMC Data PMC data can be displayed and set by using two-layer screens. The screen of the first layer is a "table control data" screen used to divide PMC data into groups and define the start address, the number of data items, type, and so forth of each group. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM] function key and [PMC Data] submenu key. Each line on the screen is referred to as a "group table", and a unique number is assigned to each group table for identification in the leftmost "No." column. The screen of the second layer is a "data table" screen used to display and set the value of each PMC data item. For details of this screen, see Subsection 2.5.11.6, "Displaying a data table of PMC data".

↑ Table control data screen

NOTE 1 If table control data is protected by the programmer

protection function, no group table is displayed. 2 To edit table control table, set the following status:

• Protect key - Released

For the release of the protect key, refer to the

relevant operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

Page 205: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 185 -

2.5.11.1 Changing the number of groups of PMC data The total number of group tables can be set on the table control data screen. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Data -

G.Count] screen.

4 Enter the total number of group tables (no exceeding 100) then click the <OK> button. Group tables as many as the specified number are displayed.

Page 206: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 186 -

2.5.11.2 Setting the table control data of PMC data The items of each group table can be set on the table control data screen.

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 By pressing the [PageUp] or [PageDown] key on the keyboard ([↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel) or the [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] (cursor) key, move the cursor to a desired item of the group table.

3 Set the items of each group table. For details, see "Explanation".

Explanation • Address Set the start address of PMC data. An address that overlaps another group may be specified. • Mode Select a PMC data mode from the following: 0: BCD format 1: Hexadecimal 2: Signed decimal 3: Unsigned decimal

• Protect From the following, choose whether to enable PMC data to be

written: 0: Enables PMC data to be written 1: Disables PMC data from being written

Page 207: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 187 -

• Type Select a PMC data type from the following: 0: BYTE type 1: WORD type 2: DWORD type 3: BIT type

• Data Set the number of PMC data items in a group table.

2.5.11.3 Finding a group number of PMC data The group table of a specified number can be displayed on the table control data screen. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Data -

Number Search] screen.

4 Enter a group number to be found, then click the <OK> button. The cursor moves to the group table of the specified number.

Page 208: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 188 -

2.5.11.4 Initializing the table control data of PMC data The table control data of the PMC path currently displayed can be initialized on the table control data screen. All of the contents of the set group tables are deleted. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Data -

Init] screen.

4 Click the <OK> button. The table control data is initialized. After initialization, the total number of group tables is 1.

Page 209: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 189 -

2.5.11.5 Switching among PMC data paths The display/setting target PMC path can be switched on the table control data screen.

NOTE This function is enabled when multiple PMC paths

are used. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Each time you press the operation key , the target PMC

path is switched and the [PMC Data] screen is updated.

The PMC path is switched in the following order: 1. First PMC 2. Second PMC 3. Third PMC 4. Dual check safety

(only when the function is added)

Page 210: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 190 -

2.5.11.6 Displaying a data table of PMC data The screen display can be switched to the screen used to display and set the PMC data values of the group table where the cursor is currently placed on the table control data screen. This screen is referred to as the "data table" screen. One of the two types of data table screens is used, depending on the type set in the group table.

↑ When the type is BYTE, WORD, or DWORD

↑ When the type is BIT

Page 211: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 191 -

NOTE Before the data table of the PMC data can be

displayed, table control data must be set. For the method of setting table control data, see Subsection 2.5.11.2, "Setting the table control data of PMC data".

Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11, "Setting PMC Data".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 When you press the operation key on the group table

of a group number to be set, the screen display is switched to the data table screen. For the items displayed on the screen, see "Explanation".

4 On the screen of the BYTE type, WORD type, or DWORD type, the cursor can be moved to a desired item by pressing the [PageUp] or [PageDown] key on the keyboard ([↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel) or the [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] (cursor) key.

5 On the screen of the BIT type, the cursor can be moved to a desired item by the following operation:

a) By pressing the operation key or , the

[PageUp] or [PageDown] key on the keyboard, or the [↑PAGE] or [↓PAGE] key on the MDI panel, move to the desired page.

b) By pressing the operation key or , or the

[↑] or [↓] (cursor) key on the keyboard or MDI panel, move to the desired item.

c) By pressing the operation key or , or the

[←] or [→] key on the keyboard or MDI panel, select a desired bit.

6 Press the operation key on the data table screen to

return to the table control data screen.

Page 212: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 192 -

Explanation • Group No., Mode, Type, Protect

Information set in the group table about the PMC data being displayed is indicated.

• Address, Data

A PMC address and its value are displayed. An address is displayed as described below, depending on the type of the group table.

- For the BYTE type or BIT type

The previous address number incremented by 1 becomes the next address number.

- For the WORD type

The previous address number incremented by 2 becomes the next address number.

- For the DWORD type

The previous address number incremented by 4 becomes the next address number.

The specifiable value range depends on the mode and type of the group table as indicated below.

Mode Type Specifiable range

BCD format BYTE type 80 to 7F BCD format WORD type 8000 to 7FFF BCD format DWORD type 80000000 to 7FFFFFFF Hexadecimal BYTE type 80H to 7FH Hexadecimal WORD type 8000H to 7FFFH Hexadecimal DWORD type 80000000H to 7FFFFFFFH

Signed decimal BYTE type -128 to 127 Signed decimal WORD type -32768 to 32767 Signed decimal DWORD type -2147483648 to 2147483647

Unsigned decimal BYTE type 0 to 255 Unsigned decimal WORD type 0 to 65535 Unsigned decimal DWORD type 0 to 4294967295

Page 213: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 193 -

2.5.11.7 Displaying a data table by specifying a PMC data group number

On the data table screen, the screen display can be switched to the data table of a specified group number. This function can display the data table of an arbitrary group without returning to the table control data screen. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen does not display a data table, display a

desired data table on the [PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11.6, "Displaying a data table of PMC data".

2 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Data -

G.Search] screen.

3 Select a desired group number from the group number combo box then click the <OK> button. The data table of the specified group is displayed.

2.5.11.8 Finding a PMC data address

The PMC data of a specified address can be found on the data table screen. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen does not display a data table, display a

desired data table on the [PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11.6, "Displaying a data table of PMC data".

2 Press the operation key to display the [PMC Data -

Search] screen.

3 Enter an address to be found, then click the <OK> button. The cursor moves to the data of the specified address.

Page 214: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 194 -

2.5.11.9 Setting data tables of PMC data Each PMC data item can be set on the data table screen. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen does not display a data table, display a

desired data table on the [PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11.6, "Displaying a data table of PMC data".

2 On the screen of the BYTE type, WORD type, or DWORD type, enter a desired value in the field to be set through the keyboard or MDI panel. Press the [Enter] key on the keyboard or the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

3 On the screen of the BIT type, a value can be changed by

pressing the operation key or , or by pressing

the space key on the keyboard. Alternatively, a value can be entered in a desired field placed at the right end.

In this case, press the operation key , the [Enter] key on

the keyboard, or the [INPUT] key on the MDI panel to set the input value with the CNC.

Press the operation key , the [Esc] key on the keyboard,

or the [CAN] key on the MDI panel to cancel the input.

Page 215: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 195 -

2.5.11.10 Displaying PMC data in decimal or hexadecimal PMC data value display can be switched between decimal display and hexadecimal display on the data table screen.

NOTE This function is enabled only on the data table

screen of the BIT type. Procedure 1 If the [PMC Data] screen does not display a data table, display a

desired data table on the [PMC Data] screen as described in Subsection 2.5.11.6, "Displaying a data table of PMC data".

2 (To switch from hexadecimal display to decimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to decimal display.

(To switch from decimal display to hexadecimal display)

Press the operation key to switch to hexadecimal

display.

Page 216: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 196 -

2.6 MESSAGES This section explains how to display alarm messages and other messages.

2.6.1 Displaying Alarm Messages Alarm messages currently issued can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [MESSAGE] function key and [ALARM] submenu key. For the meanings of alarm messages displayed, refer to the operator's manual of each CNC.

Page 217: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 197 -

2.6.2 Displaying Operator Messages Operator messages currently issued can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [MESSAGE] function key and [OPERATOR] submenu key. Operator messages are usually displayed and set to match each machine. So, the text and meanings of operator messages vary from one machine to another. For details, refer to the operator's manual of the machine tool builder.

NOTE To display operator messages, the following CNC

options are required: - External message - External data input - Custom macro

Page 218: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 198 -

2.6.3 Displaying the Alarm Message History The history of alarm messages issued so far can be displayed. This screen can be displayed by pressing the [MESSAGE] function key and [HISTORY] submenu key. For the meanings of alarm messages, refer to the operator's manual of each CNC.

Page 219: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 199 -

2.6.3.1 Deleting the entire alarm message history The entire alarm message history can be deleted.

NOTE 1 This command is valid when bit 7 of parameter No.

3195 is set to 1. 2 When this operation is performed, the following

history data is also deleted: - External operator message history - Operation history

Procedure 1 If the [Alarm History] screen is currently not displayed, display

the [Alarm History] screen as described in Subsection 2.6.3, "Displaying the Alarm Message History".

2 Press the display/operation switching key to display the

operation keys.

3 Press the operation key to display the [Alarm History -

Clear] screen.

Page 220: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 200 -

4 Click the <OK> button. The entire alarm message history is deleted.

Page 221: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 201 -

2.7 CONFIGURATION This section explains the method of setting for general operation of Basic Operation Package 2.

2.7.1 User Level and Password Basic Operation Package 2 is configured so that two user interfaces for operating the CNC can be set and one of the interfaces can be selected to meet a user level. • Level 1: Operator level

Level for operating the CNC on the production line. Usually, only simple operations such as operation state checking are performed.

• Level 2: Administrator level Level for the administrator of a machine tool builder, service organization, and so forth who needs to use all CNC functions. This level is required to set parameters.

An operator can execute only a limited range of operations. The administrator level allows all operations to be performed. To allow only limited users to set or modify setting items, a password is set. The password "fanuc" (half-size characters in lowercase) is set before shipment. The password can be changed on the [Setup] screen. So, the system administrator should change the password to an appropriate one and exercise strict control on the new password.

Page 222: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 202 -

2.7.2 Setting Basic Operation Package 2 The method of setting for Basic Operation Package 2 connection and screen configuration setting is described below. For this setting, the password is required. Procedure

1 Press the function key and the submenu key .

The [Enter password] screen is displayed.

2 Enter the password then click the <OK> button. The [Setup]

screen is displayed. For details, see Subsection 2.7.2.1, "Setting a CNC to be connected", Subsection 2.7.2.2, "Changing the user level and password", and Subsection 2.7.2.3, "Setting for each user level".

Page 223: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 203 -

3 After setting necessary data on the [Setup] screen, click the <OK> button. A confirmation screen for restarting is displayed. If you click the <Cancel> button, the set data is invalidated, and the [Setup] screen is hidden.

4 If you click the <OK> button, the set data is saved, and Basic Operation Package 2 is restarted to reflect the set data.

WARNING

• On the [Setup] screen, a setting important to the basic operation of Basic Operation Package 2 is made. If an incorrect setting is made on the [Setup] screen, not only Basic Operation Package 2 but also machines and CNCs connected can malfunction. Only a user familiar with this setting should perform operations on this screen.

• Taking the above into consideration, access is limited using the password. After the system is configured, and the operation of Basic Operation Package 2 is confirmed, the administrator should change the password and exercise strict control on the password.

Page 224: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 204 -

2.7.2.1 Setting a CNC to be connected The method of specifying a CNC to be connected is described below. Procedure 1 If the [Setup] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Setup] screen as described in Subsection 2.7.2, "Setting Basic Operation Package 2".

2 Select the [Access] tab.

3 Check a number to be connected. The setting fields of the

number become capable of being input.

4 In the name field, set an arbitrary character string that can

identify a CNC to be connected. This name is indicated in the connection destination switching data on the status bar, and in messages for all connection destinations such as alarm messages and operator messages.

Page 225: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 205 -

5 Select HSSB or Ethernet as the method of connection.

• When HSSB is selected

Enter the node number and path number of the CNC to be connected. When DNC operation is to be performed, check "DNC" and make detail settings through the <Detail> button. For details, see Section 3.9, "CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION".

• When Ethernet is selected

Enter the IP address, port number, path number, and timeout value of the CNC to be connected.

NOTE For the path numbers of CNCs, a connection

needs to be made for each path. For switching from one path to another, make a connection setting for each path and switch the connection destination with the status bar.

WARNING

For one CNC, make only one setting for DNC operation. If duplicate settings are made, the CNC can perform an unpredictable operation. Pay special attention when using multiple applications (DNC operation management package and Basic Operation Package 2) for one CNC.

Page 226: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 206 -

2.7.2.2 Changing the user level and password Which of the two user levels to use can be set. Moreover, the password required for setting general operation can be changed. Procedure 1 If the [Setup] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Setup] screen as described in Subsection 2.7.2, "Setting Basic Operation Package 2".

2 Select the [Start] tab.

• User Level Determine which of the "Operator" level and "Administrator" level is to be used when Basic Operation Package 2 is started next time. Select "Level1: Operator" for the "Operator" level. Select "Level2: Administrator" for the "Administrator" level.

• Password

The password can be changed. When changing the password, use the [Change Password] screen displayed by clicking the [Change Password] button.

Page 227: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 207 -

2.7.2.3 Setting for each user level For each user level, the method of starting, screen location and size, display language, operation key positions, navigation (operation system) files, and so forth can be set. Procedure 1 If the [Setup] screen is currently not displayed, display the

[Setup] screen as described in Subsection 2.7.2, "Setting Basic Operation Package 2".

2 Select the [User Level 1] tab or [User Level 2] tab.

• Level name Name of a setting made here. This name is indicated in the user level field on the [Start] tab.

• Title window display at start-up time Set whether to display the title window when Basic Operation Package 2 is started.

• Start-up with the previous end state Set which of the [Overall Position] screen and the screen displayed when Basic Operation Package 2 was terminated previously is to be displayed when Basic Operation Package 2 is started next time.

• Location and size at start-up time Set the location and size of the screen. Usually, the location and size used at the last termination time are automatically saved. However, the existing settings can be modified on this screen.

• Language selection Set a language to be used when Basic Operation Package 2 is started.

Page 228: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 208 -

• Detail setting Set the operations of the function keys and mode keys (keys 1 to 5 of the ten-key pad on the personal computer, and the [POSITION], [PROGRAM], [SETTING], [SYSTEM], and [MESSAGE] keys on the MDI panel). For details, see Chapter 3, "CUSTOMIZATION".

• Operation Set the location and size of a key control (array of operation keys), the number of buttons placed on a control, the navigation (operation system) definition file name corresponding to a control, and so forth. For details, see Chapter 3, "CUSTOMIZATION".

Page 229: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 209 -

2.7.3 Switching Display Language A language used for display on the Basic Operation Package 2 screens can be set. The setting is immediately reflected.

Procedure

1 Press the function key and the submenu key

to display the [Language Select Setting] screen.

2 Select a desired language from the combo box then click the <OK> button.

Page 230: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 210 -

3 The language used on the screen currently displayed is switched to the selected language. The screen below provides an example of switching to English.

Page 231: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 2.STANDARD OPERATION

- 211 -

2.7.4 Selecting the Reference Folder of a Screen Definition File A folder can be selected to reference a screen definition file. For this setting, the password is required. Basic Operation Package 2 provides two sets of screen definition files. By selecting a reference folder, the display size can be switched between VGA (640*480) and XGA (1024*768). When a customized screen is created, a folder for the definition file can also be selected. For details of customization, see Chapter 3, "CUSTOMIZATION". Procedure

1 Press the function key and the submenu key .

The [Enter Password] screen is displayed.

2 Enter the password then click the <OK> button. The [Folder

Select Setting] screen is displayed.

3 Select a folder to be referenced. Select "FANUC_VGA" to set

the display size to VGA (640*480). Select "FANUC_ XGA" to set the display size to XGA (1024*768).

4 Click the <OK> button. Basic Operation Package 2 is restarted

to change the folder to be referenced.

Page 232: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

2.STANDARD OPERATION B-63924EN/01

- 212 -

2.7.5 Displaying Version Information The version information of Basic Operation Package 2 can be displayed. Procedure

1 Press the function key and the submenu key

to display the [About Basic Operation Package 2] screen.

The following information items are displayed: - Product name - Supported OS - Version of Basic Operation Package 2 - Copyright 2 Click the <OK> button to close the screen.

Page 233: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 213 -

3 CUSTOMIZATION This chapter describes how to customize Basic Operation Package 2.

Page 234: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 214 -

3.1 OVERVIEW OF CUSTOMIZATION Basic Operation Package 2 allows you to customize the following items: • Basic customization

a) Screen position and size b) Operation key layout and the number of buttons c) Function and mode key assignment

• Operation-related customization

a) Operation key color, caption, and icon b) Navigation definition

(Screen configuration, transition, and the system of key operations, such as on-screen operations)

• Customizing child screens

a) Background color, font, and icon b) Displayed data and its scope c) Data display layout

• Customizing the status bar

a) Display item b) Color

• Customizing the message display area

a) Color • Customizing the PMC status display area

a) Color

These items have been implemented as “definition files” in plain text format. Editing these files amounts to customization; that is, you can specify what applications look like, what they display or do not display, how they are operated, and whether to hide screens. In addition to the customization of screen displays and operation systems mentioned above, you can customize the performance of DNC operations.

Page 235: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 215 -

3.2 CUSTOMIZATION FILES Each definition file is saved in the Definition folder within the folder where the package has been installed. The Definition folder contains two folders, FANUC_VGA and FANUC_XGA, just after the installation of the package. The folders on this level in the folder hierarchy are called “screen definition file folders”. Each screen definition file folder has subfolders as shown below. Each definition file is held in a subfolder.

NOTE When customizing definition files:

● Make a copy of the FANUC_VGA or FANUC_XGA folder under a different folder name within the Definition folder. Edit the definition files in the new folder.

● To use Basic Operation Package 2, select the copied folder on the [Folder Select Setting] screen.

If these rules are not followed, it is likely that Basic

Operation Package 2 may fail to operate normally or what you edited may be lost when the package is re-installed.

Page 236: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 216 -

The definition file used in basic customization is: folder-where-Basic-Operation-Package-2-is-installed\Definition\

screen-definition-file-folder\init\config.xml However, do not edit directly the config.xml file. Instead, make changes by following the procedure described in Section 3.3 “BASIC CUSTOMIZATION”.

NOTE This file does not exist just after installation.

The definition file used in operation-related customization is stored in the folder:

folder-where-Basic-Operation-Package-2-is-installed\Definition\

screen-definition-file-folder\navidef\ In the standard configuration, this folder contains the following files. You can create files under arbitrary names.

File name Summary navidefH_OP.xml Definition file for horizontal operation keys on user

level 1 navidefV_OP.xml Definition file for vertical operation keys on user level 1

navidefH.xml Definition file for horizontal operation keys on user level 2

navidefV.xml Definition file for vertical operation keys on user level 2

These files are called “navigation files”. For details, see Section 3.4,

“OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION”.

The definition file used in customizing the status bar, message display area, and PMC status display area is:

folder-where-Basic-Operation-Package-2-is-installed\Definition\

screen-definition-file-folder\init\status.xml For details of the status.xml file, see Section 3.6, “CUSTOMIZING THE STATUS BAR”, Section 3.7, “CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE DISPLAY AREA”, and Section 3.8, “CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA”.

Page 237: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 217 -

The definition file used in customizing child screens is stored in the folder:

folder-where-Basic-Operation-Package-2-is-installed\Definition\

screen-definition-file-folder\screen\ In the standard configuration, this folder contains the following files. You can create files under arbitrary names (with some exceptions).

File name Corresponding child screen absolute.xml Absolute position display screen absolute2.xml Absolute position display screen2 alarmhist.xml Alarm History screen alarmmsg.xml Alarm screen allpos.xml Overall Position display screen block.xml Block screen custommacro.xml Custom Macro screen custommacro16.xml Custom Macro screen

Note: This file cannot be renamed. dataio.xml Data I/O screen diagnoseall.xml Diagnosis screen distance.xml Distance to go display screen dncmoni.xml DNC Operation Monitor screen dncschedule.xml DNC Schedule Setting screen dncsubprg.xml DNC Sub Program Call Setting screen handy.xml Handy screen machine.xml Machine position display screen mdiprog.xml MDI Program screen modal.xml Modal screen operator.xml Operator Message screen paramall.xml Parameter screen pitch.xml Pitch screen pmcalarm.xml PMC Alarm screen pmccounter.xml PMC Counter screen pmcdata.xml PMC Data screen pmckeeprelay.xml PMC Keep Relay screen pmcstatus.xml PMC Status screen pmctimer.xml PMC Timer screen progcheck.xml Program Check screen progedit.xml Program Edit screen relative.xml Relative position display screen relative_absolute.xml Relative-absolute position display screen relative2.xml Relative position display screen 2 relative3.xml Relative position display screen 3 settimer.xml Timer screen speed.xml Actual Speed screen sysconf.xml System Configuration screen tooloffset.xml Tool Offset screen tooloffset_MTypeA.xml Tool Offset screen

(machining memory type A) Note: This file cannot be renamed.

tooloffset_MTypeB.xml Tool Offset screen (machining memory type B) Note: This file cannot be renamed.

Page 238: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 218 -

File name Corresponding child screen tooloffset_MTypeC.xml Tool Offset screen

(machining memory type C) Note: This file cannot be renamed.

tooloffset_TTypeA.xml Tool Offset screen (lathe memory type A) Note: This file cannot be renamed.

tooloffset_TTypeB.xml Tool Offset screen (lathe memory type B) Note: This file cannot be renamed.

workoffset.xml Work Zero Offset screen wshift.xml Work Shift screen

Page 239: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 219 -

3.3 BASIC CUSTOMIZATION The [Setup] screen can be used for the basic customization of overall screen layout. This screen allows you to customize: • Screen position and size • Operation key layout • Number of buttons • Function key assignment

Press the function key and then the submenu key to display the [Enter Password] screen.

After entering your password, click the <OK> button. The [Setup] screen appears. See Section 2.7, “CONFIGURATION”, for explanations about most of the items that can be specified on this screen. Section 3.3 focuses on the items to be set up and the Detail button in the Operation group box on one of the user level tabs.

Page 240: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 220 -

The screen configuration and operation system can be defined separately for each user level. Open the user level tab that corresponds to the level you want to set up or change.

<Operation group box> This box allows you to set up key control (array of operation keys) layout, size (thickness), the number of buttons in key controls, and the navigation definition file corresponding to the key controls. • Selecting key controls (check box)

Turning on key control check boxes causes the corresponding key controls to appear on the screen. Up to 4 key controls can be displayed.

• Layout

This item allows you to specify where to place each key control. A key control can be placed by making it tangential to one of 4 sides (top, bottom, left, and right sides) of the screen. In assigning sides, a key control having a lower number has precedence over the other key controls. Assuming the bottom and left sides are assigned, respectively, to key control keys 1 and 2, for example, key control 1 first occupies the bottom side, and key control 2 is placed tangentially to the left side above key control 1. Assuming the left and bottom sides are assigned, respectively, to key control keys 1 and 2, for example, key control 1 first occupies the left side, and key control 2 is placed tangentially to the bottom side at the right of key control 1.

• Buttons

This item allows you to specify how many operation keys are to be displayed in each key control. Up to 16 buttons per key control can be displayed.

Page 241: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 221 -

• Thickness This item allows you to specify the thickness of each key control in pixels.

• <Detail> button

This item allows you to specify the width of each placed button and the intervals between the buttons. Click a <Detail> button. The [Button size Setting] screen corresponding to the clicked button appears as shown below.

This screen allows you to specify the width of each button separately. - Size Type

Fixed The size of the button is fixed. It is a size (in pixels) specified in [Fixed Size].

Auto The size of the button is automatically determined. This size is obtained by subtracting the total size of Fixed buttons from the overall key control size and dividing the difference by the number of the Auto buttons.

- Margin This item allows you to specify both ends of key controls

and button-to-button spacing in pixel units.

• File and Start Action These items allow you to specify the name of the navigation definition file that specifies the action of key controls and the name of the action to begin with. They are detailed in the next chapter.

Page 242: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 222 -

• <Detail Setting> button Clicking this button opens the following screen. This screen allows you to specify what action is to take place when a function key or a mode key (on the MDI panel) is pressed.

• Function keys

This item allows you to associate each of the function keys on the CNC and those ([F1] to [F12] and [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F3] to [F11]) on the PC keyboard with the processing that is performed when a particular key control button displayed on the screen is clicked. You specify a key control number (0 to 3) and a button number (0 or greater) in the key control. Note that unlike the function keys on the PC, the soft keys in a horizontal array on the CNC are arranged in the sequence: [F11], [F1], [F2], ..., [F10], and [F12]. In addition, [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F3] corresponds to VF1, [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F4] corresponds to VF2, and so on, that is, [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[F11] corresponds to VF9. They correspond to the soft keys on the MDI panel, which correspond to the soft keys in a vertical array.

Page 243: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 223 -

• Mode keys The <POSITION>, <PROGRAM>, <SETTING>, <SYSTEM>, and <MESSAGE> buttons on the MDI panel of the CNC are called mode keys. A set of functions assigned to these buttons is known as “mode”. They correspond to numeric keys 1 to 5 on the numeric key pad of the PC. This item allows you to specify what part of the navigation definition file is to be executed when one of these keys is pressed. The mode keys and numeric keys are associated as listed below.

POSITION key 1 (numeric key) PROGRAM key 2 (numeric key) SETTING key 3 (numeric key) SYSTEM key 4 (numeric key) MESSAGE key 5 (numeric key)

- File This item allows you to specify a navigation definition file. - ConfDef This item allows you to specify the ConfDef name of the

navigation definition file for the key control to which the mode is assigned. This information becomes that part of the navigation definition file which specifies the way key control buttons are arranged.

- ColPart This item allows you to specify the colpart name in the

above mentioned ConfDef in the navigation definition file corresponding to the key control to which the mode is assigned. This information becomes that part of the navigation definition file which indicates the set of buttons in the specified key control.

- FuncDef This item allows you to specify the Funcdef name of the

navigation definition file defining the display and action of the mode. This information becomes that part of the navigation definition file which specifies the action of a button in the set of the buttons in the specified key control.

- KeyCtrl and Buttons These items allow you to specify a key control number (0 o

3) to which the mode is assigned and which button (the index attribute value, a button element) has been clicked. These button numbers exclude the select (selbtn) button from the specified button group.

This way, these items are used to specify the items in the navigation definition file. For details, see Section 3.4, “OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION”.

Page 244: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 224 -

3.4 OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION The operation systems of Basic Operation Package 2 are defined in the “Navigation Definition File”. This file is a plain text file. Editing the file can customize the appearance, such as color, caption, and icon, of each button belonging to a key control, and a combination of processes that are performed when the button is clicked. Navigation definitions are written in XML format. The XML coding rules are usually laid down using schemes. In Basic Operation Package 2, XML schemes are provided in the navi.xsd file in the navidef folder. In applications, the contents of the file are checked according to the schemes. If any coding is incorrect, an error message is displayed. Which navigation definition in which file is to be used is specified with the File and Start Action items for each key control. These items are on the Operation tab of the [Setup] screen.

NOTE Use the Unicode to write navigation definitions in

XML format.

Page 245: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 225 -

3.4.1 Navigation Definition File Configuration This subsection describes settings written as navigation definitions. Each navigation definition file is placed in the navidef folder within the same folder as for the application of interest. The contents of the file can be grouped into the 5 major categories shown below.

confs

funcs

scrns

textstyle

colors

Grouping of buttons in each key control

Display and action definitions of each button

Definitions of the configuration of the screen called by clicking a button

Caption font specification

Color specification

Overall configuration

• confs This item allows you to specify how to group buttons in each key control. You can group buttons, for example, as follows:

5 as mode keys Total of 12 buttons 1 for switching displays and operations 6 for submenus and operation menus • funcs

This item allows you to define the details of diverse functions to be associated with each group mentioned above. Navigation definitions prepared using funcs are of primary importance.

• scrns

A child screen opened by clicking a button can be displayed in combination with other child screens. For example, a combination of a position display child screen, speed display child screen, and modal information display child screen can form a single display screen. This item allows you to define the name and configuration (names, display positions, and sizes of contained child screens) of the display screen. The type of child screens to be opened by clicking a button is specified using this screen name.

• textstyles

This item allows you to specify the display styles of text used in this definition.

• colors

This item allows you to specify the colors used in this definitions.

Page 246: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 226 -

3.4.2 confs Definition • confs tag definition example (navidefH.xml) In this example, there is only one group definition (confdef tag). It is set up under the name of standard. On the Operation tab of the [Setup] screen, the target key control can be specified as a start action as shown below. In addition, the total number (count tag) of buttons defined in each colpart tag is set up as [Buttons].

The group setting consists of an 11-button group called sub and a single-button group called switch. The groups are set up starting at the left in the order in which they are defined.

The ref tag in each group (colpart tag) or a single button (sglpart tag) indicates the funcdef tag name that is initially assigned to it.

<confs> <bop2:comment>configuration definition</bop2:comment> <confdef bop2:name="func">

<sglpart bop2:name="switch"> <ref>nopswitch</ref>

</sglpart> <colpart bop2:name="sub">

<count>11</count> <ref>positionmenu</ref>

</colpart> </confdef>

</confs>

switch

sub 11 buttons

Page 247: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 227 -

3.4.3 funcs Definition The funcs tag is intended to hold more than one funcdef tag that is in charge of group-specific definition. Given below is an example of an actual funcdef tag defining displays and actions in a group. funcdef: Defining displays and actions in a group

In this example, the funcdef tag has the name systemmenu. Because its usage attribute is normal, its display and action follow the navigation definition as usual. (What occurs if this value is import is explained later.) The onload attribute is a flag indicating whether to perform the action of the button selected as the initial display of the funcdef tag. The colbtn tag defines a group. Buttons in a group are categorized by function into two major types; that is, select buttons specified in selbtn tags and general buttons. The above definition example contains one selbtn tag (one select button), and its position is specified as tenth, using the location attribute of the selbtn tag. To put it another way, the tenth button is a select button. The other buttons are general buttons. The type attribute defines the type of a button as follows:

<funcs> <funcdef bop2:name="systemmenu" bop2:usage="normal" bop2:onload="true">

<colbtn bop2:selected="0"> <selbtn bop2:location="10" bop2:seltype="upcycle" bop2:step="0" bop2:pointer="0">

: Omitted </selbtn> <button bop2:index="0" bop2:type="toggle">

: Omitted (“Parameter” data) </button> <button bop2:index="1" bop2:type="toggle">

: Omitted (“Diagnosis” data) </button>

: Omitted <button bop2:index="10" bop2:type="toggle">

: Omitted (“PMC data” data) </button>

</colbtn> </funcdef>

</funcs>

Page 248: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 228 -

Value Type Summary

“invisible” string Specifies to hide keys.

“push” string Specifies pushbuttons. Only the off state of the display and action definitions is used.

“toggle” string Specifies toggle buttons. Both the on and off states exist.

If buttons are set up for the group sub mentioned in Subsection 3.3.2, grouping is as shown below. In the above figure, the button [PARAM], whose index attribute in the button tag is “0”, is at the leftmost position among all general buttons because its pointer attribute in the selbtn tag is “0”. In addition, because the selected attribute in the colbtn tag is “0”, the button [PARAM], whose index attribute in the button attribute is “0”, is colored with the ON setting color and stays selected. For general toggle buttons, one of them is always kept in the ON state. In other words, when one toggle button is clicked to ON, the toggle button that has already been ON is automatically reset to OFF. Clicking a select button can change the setting of general buttons (assign the button tag). In the colbtn tag, it is possible to define more button tags than the number of buttons actually set up in a group. The extra button tags are assigned to general buttons by clicking the select button. In the above example, 11 button tags are defined for 10 general buttons. The following figures show how button displays change when the select button is clicked. In this case, a general button whose index attribute in the button tag is higher is selected when the select button is clicked because its seltype attribute in the selbtn tag is upcycle. In addition, as many button tags as the number of general buttons are specified because the step attribute in the selbtn tag is “0”. The step attribute can range between 0 and 15. If it is nonzero, the assignment of as many button tags as the step attribute value is re-set.

Select button General buttons

Select button

Initial display state

Display after the select button is clicked

Page 249: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 229 -

Now let us explain the button tag, which defines an individual button in a group. For example, the [POSITION] button is defined as follows:

In this example, this button is defined as a toggle type. The fact that the status tag is false means that the initial display of the button is OFF when it is not selected. If the initial display of the button is OFF, the caption of the button is obtained from a character string resource in a resource file, and language-specific labeling is also supported. As defined in the caption tag, the resource tag is set with a resource name, and the message tag, with a resource ID. The background color of the button is a color having the definition name submenu_on defined with colors, and the displayed label is an icon called Paramctl.ico. It stays displayed.

<funcs> funcdef tag

funcdef tag : <button bop2:index="0" bop2:type="toggle">

<status>false</status> <off>

<caption> <resource>m_main</resource>

<message> MSG_KEY_PARAM </message> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>submenu_off</colorref> <image>Paramctl.ico</image> <action>

: Omitted </action>

</off> <on>

<caption> <resource>m_main</resource>

<message> MSG_KEY_PARAM </message> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>submenu_on</colorref> <image>Paramctl.ico</image> <action />

</on> </button> : </funcs>

Page 250: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 230 -

This is true also if the initial display is ON.

caption element

image element

colorref element

Page 251: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 231 -

funcdef: Defining a single button Single buttons can be either ON or OFF regardless of the state of other buttons. The other ways single buttons are used are the same as for buttons in a group. Its button tag is defined right below the funcdef tag.

<funcs> : <funcdef bop2:name="switch_sys" bop2:usage="normal" bop2:onload="true">

<button bop2:type="toggle"> <status>false</status>

<off> <caption> <resource>m_main</resource> <message>MSG_KEY_OPERAT</message> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>switching</colorref> <image /> <action> : Omitted </action> </off> <on> <caption> <resource>m_main</resource> <message>MSG_KEY_DISPLAY</message> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>switching</colorref> <image /> <action> : Omitted </action> </on>

</button> </funcdef> : </funcs>

Page 252: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 232 -

action: opbfnc (switching button displays)

<funcs> : <funcdef bop2:name="switch_sys" bop2:usage="normal" bop2:onload="true">

<button bop2:type="toggle"> <status>false</status> <off>

<caption> <resource>m_main</resource> <message>MSG_KEY_OPERAT</message>

</caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>switching</colorref> <image /> <action> <opbfnc> <confname>func</confname> <target>sub</target> <name>import</name> </opbfnc> </action> </off>

<on>

<caption> <resource>m_main</resource> <message>MSG_KEY_DISPLAY</message> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>switching</colorref> <image /> <action> <opbfnc> <confname>func</confname> <target>sub</target> <name>systemmenu</name> </opbfnc> </action> </on>

</button> </funcdef> : </funcs>

Page 253: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 233 -

This example specifies that the funcdef tag corresponding to a button in the group sub be changed from systemmenu to import if the display state is changed from OFF to ON and from import to systemmenu if the display state is changed from ON to OFF. Clicking this button causes the following displays to appear. action: opscrn (starting a child screen)

In the above example, a child screen is displayed according to the scrndef tag called sys_prm.

<funcs> : <action> <opbfnc> <confname>func</confname> <target>switch</target> <name>switch_sys</name> </opbfnc> <opscrn> <name>sys_prm</name> </opscrn> </action> : </funcs>

Button to be clicked

Button to be clicked

After the button is clicked, the setting of import is displayed.

Definitions corresponding to the group sub are switched.Under this condition, the setting of systemmenu is displayed.

Page 254: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 234 -

action: opcmnd (executing a command) In the above example, the [Setup] screen is started in response to a command name of setup. This way, defining command names listed below can start a wide range of operations.

Command

name Description Parameter

“fmcls” Closes all currently displayed child screens.

None

“fmsel” Switches active child screens.

1 (for specifying the name of a child screen to be activated)

“setup” Starts the [Setup] screen. None “lngsel” Switches display

languages. None

“exit” Exits BOP2. None “selfolder” Selects a reference folder. None

“aboutdisp” Displays a dialog for BOP2 version information.

None

“cncsel” Gives focus to the CNC select combo box.

None

“keydisp” Executes display switching for a specified key control.

1 (the index of the target key control, starting at number 0, is set up.)

Operating commands on child screens requires setting the usage attribute in the funcdef tag to import. Use the following definitions.

<funcs> : <action> <opcmnd> <command>setup</command> </opcmnd>

</action> : </funcs>

Page 255: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 235 -

import: Dependence on child screens This example shows that setting the usage attribute in the funcdef tag for a button to import causes the display and operation of the button to be interlocked with the child screen that has focus at present. In this example, a select button is defined for switching purposes because the child screen has more commands than the number of general buttons. When a general button is clicked, only the display color is specified because the caption and operation of the button depend on the child screen. The commands that are actually displayed and operated are listed in Subsection 2.1.2, "Key Controls and Screen Transition". See Chapter 2, “OPERATION”, for explanations about how to operate them.

<funcs> : <funcdef bop2:name="import" bop2:usage="import" bop2:onload="false">

<colbtn bop2:selected="0"> <selbtn bop2:location="10" bop2:seltype="upcycle" bop2:step="0" bop2:pointer="0">

<off> <caption> <en>&lt;=&gt;</en><ja>⇔</ja> </caption> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>switching</colorref> <image /> <action /> </off> </selbtn> <button bop2:index="0" bop2:type="toggle"> <status>false</status> <off> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>operatemenuoff</colorref> </off> <on> <textstyle>default</textstyle> <colorref>operatemenuon</colorref> </on> </button>

</colbtn> </funcdef> : </funcs>

Command names (general buttons) are displayed. Select button

Page 256: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 236 -

3.4.4 scrns Definition The scrns tag is intended to hold more than one scrndef tag, which is a definition of the display configuration of a child screen. Shown below is an example of the scrndef tag. scrndef: Defining the configuration of child screen displays

<scrns> : <scrndef bop2:name="pos_all">

<form bop2:name="allpos"> <location>

<left>0</left> <top>0</top>

</location> <size> <width>370</width> <height>336</height> </size>

</form> <form bop2:name="modal">

<location> <left>370</left>

<top>0</top> </location>

<size> <width>265</width> <height>168</height> </size>

</form> <form bop2:name="speed">

<location> <left>370</left> <top>168</top> </location> <size> <width>265</width> <height>168</height> </size>

</form> </scrndef> : </scrns>

Page 257: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 237 -

This scrndef tag has a definition name of pos_all. This example specifies to display three child screens. Their names are defined as allpos, modal, and speed. These names match the respective child screen definition file names in the screen folder except that the child screen names have no file extension (.xml). The child screen definitions correspond to files on a one-to-one basis. Their contents are described later. These definitions specify to display these three screens. The left and top tags specify, respectively, the positions of the left and top sides of the parent screen in the child screen display area. The width and height tags specify, respectively, the width and height of a child screen in pixels. In this definition example, allpos, modal, and speed represent, respectively, the [Overall Position], [Modal], and [Actual Speed] screens. [Overall Position] screen [Actual Speed] screen [Modal] screen

Page 258: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 238 -

3.4.5 textstyles Definition The textstyles tag is intended to hold more than one textstyle tag, which is a definition of the display style of text. Given below is an example of the textstyle tag. textstyle: Defining the font of text displays

This textstyle tag is called sample_text. Specify this name if the button tag actually uses the text display style. The textalign tag allows you to define the location of the corresponding text in the key control. Its values are listed below.

Value Type Summary

“TopLeft” string Top left section of the display area “TopCenter” string Top middle section of the display area “TopRight” string Top right section of the display area “MiddleLeft” string Middle left section of the display area

“MiddleCenter” string Center of the display area “MiddleRight” string Middle right section of the display area “BottomLeft” string Bottom left section of the display area

“BottomCenter” string Bottom middle section of the display area.

“BottomRight” string Bottom right section of the display area The font tag allows you to define the font and text color to be used. The name tag allows you to specify what font to use. The specified font must previously be installed in the PC to be used. The style tag allows you to specify a font style. See the following table for explanations about the values of the tag.

Value Type Summary

“regular” string Regular style “bold” string Bold “italic” string Italic

“bold_italic” string Bold italic

<textstyles> : <textstyle bop2:name="sample_text">

<textalign>TopLeft</textalign>

<font> <name>MS Ming-style type</name> <style>bold_italic</style> <size>10</size> <colorref>samplecolor</colorref>

</font>

</textstyle> : </textstyles>

Page 259: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 239 -

The size tag allows you to specify a font size, using a number in points. The colorref tag allows you to specify the display color of text. For the value of this tag, specify the colorType tag name, using a character string. The above display example corresponds to the following portion in a black frame.

3.4.6 colors Definition The colors tag is intended to hold more than one color tag, which is used to define color. Given below is an example of using the color tag. colors: Defining a font for text to be displayed

These color tags are called mainmenu_off or mainmenu_on. These names are used to specify a color from the button tag. RGB color values are used to specify colors. The red, green, and blue tags correspond, respectively, to red, green, and blue components. Specify them using a number between 0 to 255.

<colors> : <color bop2:name="mainmenu_off">

<red>120</red> <green>160</green> <blue>96</blue> </color> <color bop2:name="mainmenu_on"> <red>88</red> <green>168</green> <blue>96</blue>

</color> :

</colors>

Page 260: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 240 -

3.5 CUSTOMIZING CHILD SCREENS Basic Operation Package 2 allows the display position and size of child screens to be determined according to navigation. However, screen displays are configured by referencing information in files defining the respective child screens. For this reason, the information in definition files can be used to customize the aspects, such as display information, layout, and background color, of the screen.

↑Child screens can be customized as shown above.

Page 261: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 241 -

3.5.1 Definition Files and XML Schemas In Basic Operation Package 2, definition files in XML format describe the type and scope of data displayed on screens, its display format (such as layout, font, and background color) for each display form separately. When a form is started, its screens are configured according to data in the definition files. For this reason, rewriting the definition files can customize screens. Data and its format in a definition file are specified using XML schemas (rules and syntax) held in the same folder as for the definition file. When a form is started, its definitions are checked for consistency according to the XML schemas. Concretely, an error occurs when the form is started unless its definition files have been written correctly according to XML schemas. The following subsections of this section explain what is written in XML schemas, using some examples.

NOTE Use the Unicode to create definition files in XML

format.

Page 262: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 242 -

3.5.2 Definition Data All child screens have their own names. These names are used to call them. Each child screen has a definition file identified with the screen name plus an extension (.xml). Definitions are held in the definition file. Definition data consists of a common definition part (for specifying the operations of the child screen) and a page definition part (for specifying data to be displayed on the child screen).

p ages

Common

backcolor Reflected on all page definitions (if omitted, system default data is used)controlbase

datatype target timer titlebar

pp age p age p age p age label

data_series

label label image backcolor controlbase

data_series data_series s_no e_no

controlbase

data data data

controlbase

Reflected on all data_series tag definitions

Reflected on all data tag definitions

Page 263: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 243 -

3.5.3 Common Definition Part This part defines the type of data displayed on the child screen, the number of the connected CNC, intervals at which displays are updated, whether to display a title bar, and a caption used if the title bar is displayed.

The above example indicates: The child screen is the [Parameter] screen, the CNC to be connected is CNC No. 0 (corresponding to CNC1 on the connection tab in Basic Operation Package 2 configuration definitions), the screen update interval (at which the screen is updated (if necessary) with data obtained from the CNC) is 1 second (in ms units), a title bar is displayed, and the caption on the title bar is “Parameter”. (Note: The CNC to be connected may be specified as variable according to navigation definitions.)

• datatype This item allows you to define the type of child screens to be

displayed. The definition must be in plain text format. It determines the type of child screens. The following table lists datatype tag definitions and the corresponding child screens.

Child screen name datatype tag value Position display screen f_position Modal screen f_modal Actual Speed screen f_speed Program Check screen f_progcheck Program block screen f_block Program Edit screen f_progedit MDI Program screen f_mdiprog DNC Operation Monitor screen f_dncmonitor DNC Schedule Setting screen f_dncschedule DNC Sub Program Call Setting screen f_dncsubprg Handy screen f_handy Timer screen f_settimer Tool Offset screen f_tooloffset

<formCommon>

<datatype>f_param</datatype>

<target>0</target>

<timer >

<interval>1000</interval>

</timer>

<titlebar bop2:enabled="false">

<text>Parameter</text>

</titlebar>

</formCommon>

Page 264: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 244 -

Child screen name datatype tag value Custom Macro screen f_custommacro Work Zero Offset screen f_workoffset Work Shift screen f_shift Parameter screen f_param Diagnosis screen f_diagnose System Configuration screen f_sysconf Data I/O screen f_dataio Pitch screen f_pitcherror PMC Status screen f_pmcstatus PMC Alarm screen f_pmcalarm PMC Counter screen f_pmccounter PMC Timer screen f_pmctimer PMC Keep Relay screen f_pmckeeprelay PMC Data screen f_pmcdata Alarm Message screen f_alarmmsg Operator Message screen f_operator Alarm History screen f_alarmhist

• target This item allows you to define a CNC to be connected, using a number (0 to 9). In the standard definition state, this definition is ignored because the CNC to be connected is synchronized with the display on the status bar. Enabling the definition f a CNC to be connected requires switching definitions in the navigation definition file.

• timer - interval The interval tag allows you to define a timer update interval in

ms units. No timer-interval definition is valid on the [Program Edit], [MDI Program], [System Configuration], [DNC Sub Program Call Setting], and [DNC Schedule Setting] screens because no timer-triggered update is performed on these screens.

• titlebar bop2:enabled The enabled attribute allows you to specify whether to display

the title bar of the child screen, using the keyword “true” or “false”. If the attribute is omitted, it is assumed as “false” (default).

Whether to display the title bar enabled attribute definition

Display true Hide false

• titlebar - text The text tag allows you to define the caption of a child screen

title bar. The caption can be entered either directly in this tag or selected from text in a resource file. For details, see Subsection 3.5.3.1, “text definitions”.

Page 265: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 245 -

3.5.3.1 text definitions The text tag allows you to define a caption to be displayed. The following two methods can be used to define captions. 1. Directly defining a caption in the text tag

By this method, you can define a caption directly in the text tag.

The caption is fixed even when display languages are switched. If you want to have captions fixed, use this method. If you need to switch display languages, use method 2.

2. Specifying a caption, using text from a resource file

You can get text from a resource file and use it as a caption.

The resource file contains text supporting different languages. This definition method supports language switching. Method 1 takes precedence if the text tag contains directly defined text.

<text> <resource>m_pos</resource> <message>MSG_POS_TITLE_OVR</message>

</text>

<text>Overall Position Display</text>

Page 266: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 246 -

3.5.4 Display Definition Part For a certain screen, the display definition part can contain more than one page. Each of the pages can be selected, using the PGUP, PGDN, and PGSEL commands assigned to soft keys. This definition contains a label, an icon, and a sequence of data. The data sequence can consist of two or more pieces of data.

Details of child screen customization

custom

Label

Icon

Title bar

CNC data

An arbitrary number of labels, icons, and CNC data items can be placed on the screen, and the position and size of each element can be specified.

(whether to display the title bar can be specified, and a caption can be specified)

(layout can be specified at your discretion, the table pattern is determined according to the data type, and data writing is handled by a method started from an automatic scan key, using a timer whose interval value can be specified)

(any text can be displayed)

(an arbitrary image can be used)

Write definitions to a file in XML format.

Page 267: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 247 -

3.5.4.1 label definitions The label tag is used to display an arbitrary character string on the screen.

• text This item allows you to define text displayed as a label. For

details, see Subsection 3.5.3.1, “text definitions”.

• textalign This item allows you to define the display position of text within

a label. The definition must be in text format. The following table lists each definition and the corresponding display position.

<label> <text>Parameter (Setting Page)</text> <textalign>MiddleCenter</textalign> <font>

<name>MS Gothic</name> <style>bold</style> <size>16</size> <forecolor>

<red>10</red> <green>11</green> <blue>12</blue>

</forecolor> </font> <backcolor>

<red>144</red> <green>144</green> <blue>160</blue>

</backcolor> <location>

<left>176</left> <top>136</top>

</location> <size>

<width>296</width> <height>40</height>

</size> </label>

Page 268: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 248 -

Text display position within the label

label – textalign tag value

Top left TopLeft Top middle TopCenter Top right TopRight Middle left MiddleLeft Center MiddleCenter Middle right MiddleRight Bottom left BottomLeft Bottom middle BottomCenter Bottom right BottomRight

• font This item allows you to define the font of text displayed within a

label. For details, see Subsection 3.5.4.6, “font definitions”.

• backcolor This item allows you to define the background color of a label. Use RGB color values in definitions. The red, green, and blue

tags correspond to the red, green, and blue components, respectively. Each RGB color value can range between 0 and 255.

• location This item allows you to define the position of the top left corner

of a label. The left and top tags correspond to the positions of the label

represented in pixels, respectively, along the horizontal and vertical axes.

• size This item allows you to define the size of a label. The width and height tags correspond to the width and height of

the label represented in pixels, respectively.

Page 269: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 249 -

3.5.4.2 image definitions An image can be displayed on the screen according to the definitions in the image tag.

• source This item allows you to define an image file name. Images are defined, using file names. If no file path is defined,

the folder that contains Bop2.exe is searched for image files.

• location This item allows you to define the position of the top left corner

of a label. The left and top tags correspond to the positions of the label

represented in pixels, respectively, along the horizontal and vertical axes.

• size This item allows you to define the size of a label. The width and height tags correspond to the width and height of

the label represented in pixels, respectively.

Example <image>

<source>160i180i210i.jpg</source> <location>

<left>24</left> <top>16</top>

</location> <size>

<width>136</width> <height>184</height>

</size> </image>

Page 270: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 250 -

3.5.4.3 pmcchk definitions Definitions in the pmcchk tag can be used to display whether a PMC alarm has occurred, the status of program execution, and the PMC status information representing the target PMC system.

Example <pmcchk>

<backcolor /> <red>192</red> <green>192</green> <blue>192</blue>

</backcolor> <panelbackcolor>

<red>224</red> <green>224</green> <blue>224</blue>

</panelbackcolor> <font>

<name>MS UI Gothic</name> <style>standard</style> <size>9</size> <forecolor />

</font> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>8</top>

</location> <size>

<width>610</width> <height>28</height>

</size> <timerinterval>1000</timerinterval>

</pmcchk>

panelbackcolor backcolor

size

font

Page 271: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 251 -

• backcolor This item allows you to define the background color of a control. Use RGB color values in definitions. The red, green, and blue

tags correspond to the red, green, and blue components, respectively. Each RGB color value can range between 0 and 255.

If no color is specified, the definition in the status.xml is reflected on the background color. For details, see Section 3.8, “CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA”.

• panelbackcolor This item allows you to define the default background color of a

panel. Use RGB color values in definitions. The red, green, and blue

tags correspond to the red, green, and blue components, respectively. Each RGB color value can range between 0 and 255.

If no color is specified, the definition in the status.xml is reflected on the background color. For details, see Section 3.8, “CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA”.

• font This item allows you to define a font used in a control. For details, see Subsection 3.5.4.6, “font definitions”.

• location This item allows you to define the position of the top left corner

of a PMC status display. The left and top tags correspond to the positions of the PMC

status display represented in pixels, respectively, along the horizontal and vertical axes.

• size This item allows you to define the size of a control. The width and height tags correspond to the width and height of

the control represented in pixels, respectively.

• timerinterval This item allows you to define a timer update interval in ms units.

If a value of 0 or lower is defined, no timer-triggered display update takes place.

NOTE The forecolor tag is not used.

Page 272: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 252 -

3.5.4.4 data_series definitions The data_series tag is used to display CNC information displayed on child screens. How to define CNC information using this tag may very from a child screen to another. For details, see Subsection 3.5.5, “Child Screen Definitions”. This subsection explains basic concepts, using some example of definition files for position display screens.

This example displays the relative and absolute positions of axes 0 to 255 except the absolute positions of axes 3 and 5. The relative display position is: (X, Y) = (10, 5). The absolute display position is: (X, Y) = (185, 5). The display example of the above definitions is:

<data_series> <datatype>relative</datatype> <s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>5</top>

</location> </controlbase/>

</data_series> <data_series>

<datatype>absolute</datatype> <s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <data>

<source>3</source> </data> <data>

<source>5</source> </data> <location>

<left>185</left> <top>5</top>

</location> <controlbase/>

</data series>

The Z1- and B1-axes disappear.

Page 273: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 253 -

For display units of CNC data, a predetermined template is arranged based on the screen of interest. However, the display size, font, and background color of the template are defined in the cotrolbase tag. Definitions to be reflected on all page tags are defined in the backcolor and cotrolbase tags in the pages tag. The backcolor and cotrolbase tags in a specific page tag are valid for the display on the page and a series of data belonging to the display. The data_series tag handles a set of data between the start number and end number in a batch. The controlbase tag is valid for all data contained here unless a data-specific definition is made.

• protect This item allows you to define the protect attribute of display

information. The protect attribute is intended to disable input by putting

read-only state in effect. For details, see Subsection 3.5.5, “Child Screen Definitions”.

• s_no This item allows you to define the start number of display

information, which varies from one child screen to another. For details, see Subsection 3.5.5, “Child Screen Definitions”.

• e_no This item allows you to define the end number of display

information, which varies from one child screen to another. For details, see Subsection 3.5.5, “Child Screen Definitions”.

• location This item allows you to define the position of the top left corner

of a data status display area within a child screen. The left and top tags correspond to the positions of the data status

display area represented in pixels, respectively, along the horizontal and vertical axes.

• data If you want to customize only specific data, you can set up a data

tag for the data to define its contents. (If there is no data tag, definitions in the data_series tag on an upper level are applied.)

For details, see Subsection 3.5.5, “Child Screen Definitions”.

• controlbase This item allows you to define the background color, size, and

font type for a control. For details, see Subsection 3.5.4.5, “controlbase definitions”.

Page 274: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 254 -

3.5.4.5 controlbase definitions The controlbase tag allows you to define the background color, size, and font for a control. Only one piece of information can be defined in each of the pages, page, data_series, and data tags.

p ages Reflected on all page tag definitions

(if omitted, the system default data is used)

p age p age p age p age

data_series data_series data_series

data data data

Reflected on all data_series tag definitions

(if omitted, the controlbase tag in the Pages element is used)

controlbase

controlbase

controlbase

controlbase

Reflected on all data tag definitions

(if omitted, the controlbase tag in the data_series element is used)

(if omitted, the controlbase tag in the Page element is used)

If no definition is made in the controlbase tag in the data tag, the controlbase tag in the data_series tag is reflected on the controlbase tag in the data tag. Likewise, the controlbase tag in the data_series tag reflects the page tag, and the controlbase tag in the page tag reflects the controlbase tag in the pages tag.

Page 275: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 255 -

Explained below is how to describe controlbase definitions.

• backcolor This item allows you to define the background color for a

control. Use RGB color values in definitions. The red, green, and blue

tags correspond to the red, green, and blue components, respectively. Each RGB color value can range between 0 and 255.

• font This item allows you to define a font for a control. For details, see Subsection 3.5.4.6, “font definitions”.

• size This item allows you to define the size of a control. The width and height tags correspond to the width and height of

the control represented in pixels, respectively.

<controlbase> <backcolor>

<red>0</red> <green>128</green> <blue>255</blue>

</backcolor> <font>

<name>MS Gothic</name> <style>bold</style> <size>12</size> <forecolor>

<red>0</red> <green>128</green> <blue>255</blue>

</forecolor> </font> <size>

<width>450</width> <height>356</height>

</size> </controlbase>

Page 276: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 256 -

3.5.4.6 font definitions The font tag is explained below. This tag allows you to define the style, size, and color of a font for a child screen. If nothing is defined in the font tag, the child screen follows the font definitions for the parent screen.

• name This item allows you to define a font name. The specified font must previously be installed in the PC to be

used. Therefore, the fonts you can use vary depending on the environment of your PC.

• style This item allows you to define a font style. The following table lists the font styles that can be used.

Font style style tag value Regular standard Bold bold Italic italic Bold italic bold_italic

• size This item allows you to define a font size in points.

<font> <name>MS Gothic</name> <style>bold</style> <size>12</size> <forecolor>

<red>0</red> <green>128</green> <blue>255</blue>

</forecolor> </font>

Page 277: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 257 -

• forecolor This item allows you to define a font color. Use RGB color values in definitions. The red, green, and blue

tags correspond to the red, green, and blue components, respectively. Each RGB color value can range between 0 and 255.

For some child screen types, it is possible to use more than one

forecolor tag.

For explanations about what font color the forecolor index attribute corresponds to, see descriptions about individual child screens.

<font> <name>MS Gothic</name> <style>bold</style> <size>12</size> < index="0" is Basic Color --> <forecolor bop2:index="0">

<red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</forecolor> < index="1" is Edit Color --> <forecolor bop2:index="1">

<red>255</red> <green>0</green>

<blue>0</blue> </forecolor> < index="2" is ReStart Color --> <forecolor bop2:index="2"> <red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>255</blue> </forecolor>

</font>

Page 278: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 258 -

3.5.5 Child Screen Definitions Each child screen has their own definition methods because of differences in CNC data to be handled and display methods to be used. Explanations are as follows:

Page 279: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 259 -

3.5.5.1 Display position screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain up to 128 data_series tag definitions. The type of position information can be defined, using the datatype tag in the data_series tag.

<data_series> <s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <datatype>relative</datatype> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>5</top>

</location> </data_series> <data_series>

<s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <datatype>absolute</datatype> <location>

<left>185</left> <top>5</top>

</location> </data_series> <data_series>

<s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <datatype>machine</datatype> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>165</top>

</location> </data_series> <data_series>

<s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>255</e_no> <datatype>distance</datatype> <location>

<left>185</left> <top>165</top>

</location> </data_series>

Page 280: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 260 -

The following [Overall Position] screen exemplifies a 7-axis application. • data_series This item allows you to define the types (such as absolute,

relative, machine, and distance to go) of position information to be displayed.

Defining only the type of position information to be displayed enables only the necessary information to be displayed. It is possible to display more than one piece of information of the same type; up to 128 pieces can be defined.

• s_no The s_no tag allows you to define the start number for axis

number displays. Including 0 causes the title (such as relative or absolute) of axis

information to be displayed automatically.

• e_no The e_no tag allows you to define the end number for axis

number displays. Including 0 causes the title (such as relative or absolute) of axis

information to be displayed automatically.

• datatype The datatype tag allows you to determine the type of position

information about a display axis. Each position information type is defined, using a character

string as listed below.

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 281: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 261 -

Displayed position information

datatype tag value

Relative position relative Absolute position absolute Machine position machine Distance to go distance

• location This tag allows you to define the position of the top left corner of

a display area. The left and top tags correspond to the positions of the display

area represented in pixels, respectively, along the horizontal and vertical axes.

• controlbase This tag allows you to defined display information in the page

tag. The display information includes the size, background color, and

font of a control. For details, see Subsection 3.5.4.5, “controlbase definitions”.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

Let us change the above example as shown below and see what is

displayed.

<data_series> <s_no>1</s_no> <e_no>4</e_no> <datatype>relative</datatype> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>5</top>

</location> <data>

<source>3</source> </data>

</data_series> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is defined) </controlbase>

Page 282: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 262 -

Only the relative position information is displayed because the other axis information has been deleted.

Information about the first to fourth axes is displayed.

Information about the third axis is not displayed because of the effect of “3” defined in the source tag in the data tag.

• data This item is used to hide information about axes in a range

between the s_no and e_no tag definitions. Up to 128 axes can be defined.

First axis 1 (within a range defined using the s_no and e_no tags)

Fourth axis (within a range defined using the s_no and e_no tags)

Information about the third axis is not displayed (due to the source in the data tag)

Page 283: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 263 -

3.5.5.2 Modal Screen-Specific Definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>5</left> <top>35</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 284: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 264 -

3.5.5.3 Actual Speed screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain up to two data_series tag definitions. The datatype tag in the data_series tag must contain the F (feedrate) or S (spindle rotation speed) definition according to the type of data to be displayed. On top of that, the data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

<data_series> <datatype>F</datatype> <location>

<left>5</left> <top>45</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series> <data_series>

<datatype>S</datatype> <location>

<left>5</left> <top>110</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

F specified in datatype

S specified in datatype

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 285: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 265 -

• datatype The datatype tag allows you to determine the type of information

to be displayed. Each information type is defined, using a character string, as

listed below. Displayed information datatype tag value

Feedrate F Spindle rotation speed S

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

Page 286: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 266 -

3.5.5.4 Program Check screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Current-line font color 1

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 287: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 267 -

3.5.5.5 Program block screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain up to 128 data_series tag definitions. The datatype tag in the data_series tag must always contain the current (current block) or next (next block) definition according to the type of data to be displayed. On top of that, the data_series tag can contain location and controlbase tag definitions; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

<data_series> <datatype>current</datatype> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series> <data_series>

<datatype>next</datatype> <location>

<left>315</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tagcurrent is specified in datatype.

next is specified in datatype. Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 288: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 268 -

• datatype The datatype allows you to determine the type of information to

be displayed. Each information type is defined, using a character string, as

listed below. Displayed information datatype tag value

Current block current Next block next

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

Page 289: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 269 -

3.5.5.6 Program Edit screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored. The [Program Edit] screen does not support timer-triggered display update. Therefore, the timer tag in the formCommon tag is invalid for this screen.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>30</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 290: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 270 -

3.5.5.7 MDI program edit screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored. The [MDI Program] screen does not support timer-triggered display update. Therefore, the timer tag in the formCommon tag is invalid for this screen.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>20</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 291: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 271 -

3.5.5.8 DNC Operation Monitor screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data series>

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 292: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 272 -

3.5.5.9 DNC Schedule Setting screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 293: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 273 -

3.5.5.10 DNC Sub Program Call Setting screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 294: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 274 -

3.5.5.11 Handy screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Font color used in editing 1

<data_series> <location>

<left>40</left> <top>55</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 295: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 275 -

3.5.5.12 Timer screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Font color used in editing 1

<data_series> <location>

<left>25</left> <top>70</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 296: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 276 -

3.5.5.13 Tool Offset screen-specific definitions This screen requires six definition files.

• “tooloffset.xml” This is a file for specifying a CNC to be connected when two or

more screens are displayed simultaneously. The file can be renamed at your discretion. This file name is used in navigation file registration. More than one file that is equivalent to “tooloffset.xml” can be

created. Only the datatype and target tags in the formCommon tag are

valid for the “tooloffset.xml” files.

Files other than “tooloffset.xml” are grouped into five by tool

offset type.

• “tooloffset_MTypeA.xml” Screen layout definition file for M series memory type A

• “tooloffset_MTypeB.xml” Screen layout definition file for M series memory type B

• “tooloffset_MTypeC.xml” Screen layout definition file for M series memory type C

• “tooloffset_TTypeA.xml” Screen layout definition file for T series memory type A

• “tooloffset_TTypeB.xml” Screen layout definition file for T series memory type B

NOTE These five definition files have fixed names; they

cannot be renamed. The size and layout are fixed for individual tool offset types separately.

The datatype and target tag definitions in the following files are

dummies, but they are always needed:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?>

<bop2:ScreenDef xmlns:bop2="http://www.fanuc.co.jp/bop2">

<formCommon>

<datatype>f_tooloffset</datatype>

<target>0</target>

Page 297: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 277 -

“tooloffset_MTypeA.xml”, “tooloffset_MTypeB.xml”, “tooloffset_MTypeC.xml”, “tooloffset_TTypeA.xml”, and “tooloffset_TTypeB.xml”

The index attribute in the page tag is defined as follows: Definitions for T series memory type B

Displayed information index attribute number Figure 1 Wear 2

Definitions for M series memory type C

Displayed information index attribute number Tool length 1 Tool diameter 2

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?>

<bop2:ScreenDef xmlns:bop2="http://www.fanuc.co.jp/bop2">

<formCommon>

<datatype> f_tooloffset </datatype>: Dummy value

<target>0</target>: Dummy value

<timer bop2:auto="false">

: Omitted (otherwise, display update period is

specified)

</timer>

<titlebar bop2:enabled="false">

: Omitted (otherwise, title caption is specified)

Page 298: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 278 -

The data_series tag can contain s_no, e_no, location, and controlbase tag definitions; any other items (such as protect attribute, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• s_no This tag allows you to define the start number of a tool offset

data number display range. • e_no This tag allows you to define the end number of a tool offset data

number display range.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3 Font color for valid-data range (within valid range)

4

Font color for valid-data range (out of valid range)

5

<data_series> <s_no>1</s_no> <e_no>999</e_no> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>30</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 299: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 279 -

3.5.5.14 Custom Macro screen-specific definitions Two types of definition files are used for this screen.

• “custommacro.xml” This file is used to clarify a CNC to be connected when more

than one screen is displayed simultaneously. It can be renamed at your discretion.

This file name is used in navigation file registration. More than one file that is equivalent to “custommacto.xml” can

be created. The definitions valid in the “custommacto.xml” include the

datatype and target tag definitions in the formCommon tag.

Files other than “custommacro.xml” are grouped by CNC type. • “custommacro16.xml” This is a definition file for the FS30i. This file name is fixed;

the file cannot be renamed.

NOTE The name of this definition file is fixed; it cannot

be renamed. The layout and size are fixed for individual CNC types separately.

The datatype and target tag definitions in the

“custommacro16.xml” file are dummies, but they are always needed

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?>

<bop2:ScreenDef xmlns:bop2="http://www.fanuc.co.jp/bop2">

<formCommon> <datatype>f_custommacro</datatype>

<target>0</target>

</formCommon>

Page 300: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 280 -

Given below are the pages tag definitions:

The following table lists the values of the index attribute in the

page tag. Displayed information index attribute number

Local variable 0 Common variable 1 1 Common variable 2 2

<pages bop2:count="3" bop2:selected="0"> <page bop2:index="0">

: Local variable </page> <page bop2:index="1">

: Common variable 1 </page> <page bop2:index="2">

: Common variable 2 </page>

</pages>

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?>

<bop2:ScreenDef xmlns:bop2="http://www.fanuc.co.jp/bop2">

<formCommon> <datatype>f_custommacro</datatype>: Dummy value

<target>0</target>: Dummy value

<timer bop2:auto="false">

: Omitted (otherwise, display update period is

specified)

</timer>

<titlebar bop2:enabled="false">

: Omitted (otherwise, title caption is specified)

</titlebar>

Page 301: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 281 -

The data_series tag can contain s_no, e_no, location, and

controlbase tag definitions; any other items (such as protect attribute, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• s_no This item allows you to define the start number of a custom

macro number display range. • e_no This item allows you to define the end number of a custom

macro number display range.

<data_series> <s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>306</e_no> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>30</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 302: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 282 -

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

Page 303: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 283 -

3.5.5.15 Work Zero Offset screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. This screen is used to display work zero offset information (serial number) contained in the range specified using the s_no and e_no tags. On top of that, the data_series tag can contain location and controlbase tag definitions; any other items (such as protect attribute, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

<data_series> <s_no>0</s_no> <e_no>306</e_no> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>30</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 304: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 284 -

3.5.5.16 Work Shift screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3 Font color for valid-data range(within valid range)

4

Font color for valid-data range(out of valid range)

5

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 305: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 285 -

3.5.5.17 Parameter screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain up to 128 data_series tag definitions. The page tag can contain only subtitle and data_series tag definitions; any other items (such as index attribute, label tag, image tag, backcolor attribute, and controlbase tag) in the page tag are ignored.

The first data_series tag can contain only a location tag definition. It is used to define the display start position (top left corner) of parameter information. The subsequent parameter information displays are arranged in a vertical array. The second and subsequent data_series tags can contain protect attribute, s_no tag, and e_no tag definitions. • s_no This tag allows you to define the start number for parameters to

be protected from editing or hidden. • e_no This tag allows you to define the end number for parameters to

be protected from editing or hidden. • protect This item allows you to specify to write-protect or hide the

parameters in a range identified with the s_no and e_no definitions within the same data_series tag.

Displayed parameter information

protect attribute value

Protected from editing True Hidden False

<data_series> <location>

<left>60</left> <top>10</top>

</location> </data_series> <data_series bop2:protect="false">

<s_no>9000</s_no> <e_no>9999</e_no> </data_series>

</page>

Page 306: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 286 -

On the [Parameter] screen, the size of a control defined in the controlbase tag is that required to display one piece of parameter information.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute numberBasic font color 0 Font color used in editing 1 Font color for the parameter number representing a parameter that requires restart after update

2

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 307: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 287 -

3.5.5.18 Diagnosis screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain up to 128 data_series tag definitions. The page tag can contain only subtitle and data_series tag definitions; any other items (such as index attribute, label tag, image tag, backcolor attribute, and controlbase tag) in the page tag are ignored.

The first data_series tag can contain only a location tag definition. It is used to define the display start position (top left corner) of diagnosis information. The subsequent diagnosis information displays are arranged in a vertical array. The second and subsequent data_series tags can contain s_no and e_no tag definitions. Any information having a diagnosis number in a range defined using the s_no and e_no tags is not displayed. • s_no This item allows you to define a start number for diagnosis

information to be hidden. • e_no This item allows you to define an end number for diagnosis

information to be hidden.

<page> <data_series>

<location> <left>60</left> <top>10</top>

</location> </data_series> <data_series>

<s_no>10</s_no> <e_no>20</e_no>

</data_series> </page>

Page 308: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 288 -

On the [Diagnosis] screen, the size of a control defined in the controlbase tag is that required to display one piece of diagnosis information.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 309: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 289 -

3.5.5.19 System Configuration screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored. No timer-triggered display update is performed on the [System Configuration] screen because no chronological change is made on it. Therefore, timer tag definitions in the formCommon tag are invalid.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>50</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 310: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 290 -

3.5.5.20 Data I/O screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 311: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 291 -

3.5.5.21 Pitch screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Page 312: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 292 -

3.5.5.22 PMC Status screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

The data_series tag can contain only a location tag definition. It is used to define the display start position (top left corner) of PMC addresses. The subsequent address information displays are arranged in a vertical array. • forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Page 313: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 293 -

3.5.5.23 PMC Alarm screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number

PMC system display font color 0 PMC alarm number font color 1 PMC alarm message font color 2

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Page 314: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 294 -

3.5.5.24 PMC Counter screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

<data_series> <location>

<left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Page 315: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 295 -

3.5.5.25 PMC Timer screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

<data_series> <location>

<left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Page 316: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 296 -

3.5.5.26 PMC Keep Relay screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

The data_series tag can contain only a location tag definition. It is used to define the display start position (top left corner) of PMC addresses. The subsequent address information displays are arranged in a vertical array.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Font color used in editing 1

<data_series> <location>

<left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Page 317: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 297 -

3.5.5.27 PMC Data screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain two page tag definitions. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored. If the index in the page tag is 0, what is defined is information about the table control data screen and data table screen (BYTE, WORD, and DWORD types) of PMC data.

• Table control data screen This screen is defined as follows:

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

<page bop2:index="0"> <data_series>

<location> <left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

</page>

Page 318: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 298 -

• Data table screen (BYTE, WORD, and DWORD types) This screen is defined as shown below. Three columns “No.”, “Address”, and “Data” are handled as a

combination. As many combinations as fit to the entire screen width can be displayed. Extra combinations are discarded. Likewise, as many lines as fit to the entire screen height can be displayed. Extra lines are discarded.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Basic-cell font color 1 Fixed-cell font color 2 Font color used in editing 3

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Discarded

Discarded

Page 319: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 299 -

If the index attribute in the page tag is 1, what is defined is information about the data table screen (BIT type) of PMC data.

The data_series tag can contain only a location tag definition. It is used to define the display start position (top left corner) of PMC addresses. The subsequent address information displays are arranged in a vertical array. • forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0 Font color used in editing 1

<page bop2:index="1"> <data_series>

<location> <left>42</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

</page>

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag in the page tag where the index attribute is 1

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag in the page tag where the index attribute is 1

Page 320: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 300 -

3.5.5.28 Alarm Message screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>45</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 321: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 301 -

3.5.5.29 Operator Message screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition.

The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>50</left> <top>40</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 322: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 302 -

3.5.5.30 Alarm History screen-specific definitions The pages tag can contain only one page tag definition. The page tag can contain only one data_series tag definition. The data_series tag can contain only location and controlbase tag definitions. In other words, only control position and display method definitions are valid; any other items (such as protect attribute, s_no tag, e_no tag, datatype tag, and data tag) in the data_series tag are ignored.

• forecolor in the font tag in the controlbase tag

forecolor type index attribute number Basic font color 0

<data_series> <location>

<left>10</left> <top>60</top>

</location> <controlbase>

: Omitted (otherwise, control information is described)

</controlbase> </data_series>

Display based on one data_series tag

Height defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Width defined in the size tag in the controlbase tag

Page 323: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 303 -

3.6 CUSTOMIZING THE STATUS BAR Basic Operation Package 2 allows display items on the status bar, their size, and color to be customized by editing the status.xml file (see Section 3.2, “CUSTOMIZATION FILES”).

NOTE 1 Be extremely careful when editing definition files.

It is recommended that before changing definition files, you make a backup copy of them.

2 Use the Unicode in editing definition files.

Page 324: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 304 -

3.6.1 Status Bar Displays Explained below are displays on the status bar. The status bar has two rows (upper and lower rows) for information display.

• Items displayed on the status bar

Number in the figure Item

① Whether an alarm has occurred on any connected CNC

② CNC system number (no display by default) ③ Selected program name ④ Sequence number ⑤ Current time

⑥ CNC switching (if more than one CNC connection setting is available)

⑦ Automatic or manual operation mode ⑧ Automatic operation status ⑨ Axis movement and dwell status

⑩ Emergency stop status/M, S, T, or B function status

⑪ Alarm status ⑫ Other statuses

Page 325: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 305 -

3.6.2 Specifying the Size of Status Display Items The panelsize tag can be used to specify the size of display items on the status bar. What can be specified is only the width of items on the lower row. • panelsize This item allows you to specify the width of the following items:

“Automatic or manual operation mode”, “Automatic operation status”, “Axis movement and dwell status”, “Emergency stop status/M,S,T, or B function status”, “Alarm status”, and “Other statuses”. A specified value is reflected in all items.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <panelsize>70</panelsize> :

</status>

Page 326: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 306 -

3.6.3 Selecting Status Display Items The commonstatus tag can be used to select what to display on the status bar.

• commonstatus Changing the value of each element listed below can specify

whether to display the respective items. To display an item, select "True" for it. To hide an item, select

"False" for it.

Display select item Element Value CNC system number head visible "True" / "False"

Selected program name

program visible "True" / "False"

Sequence number sequence visible "True" / "False" Current time time visible "True" / "False"

CNC switching cncswitch visible "True" / "False"

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <commonstatus>

<head visible="False" /> <program visible="True" /> <sequence visible="True" /> <time visible="True" /> <cncswitch visible="True" />

</commonstatus> :

</status>

Page 327: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 307 -

3.6.4 Specifying Status Bar Colors Explained below is how to specify status bar colors. The colors tag can be used to specify the background color for the entire status bar and the background and caption colors for individual display items separately.

Page 328: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 308 -

3.6.4.1 Specifying status bar basic colors The status bar consists of two rows (upper and lower rows). The status1 and status2 tags can be used to specify the basic color, respectively, for the upper and lower rows.

• status1 This item corresponds to the upper row of the status bar. • status2 This item corresponds to the lower row of the status bar.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <colors>

: <status1>

<backcolor> <red>208</red> <green>232</green> <blue>255</blue>

</backcolor> <forecolor>

<red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</forecolor> <panelcolor>

<red>255</red> <green>255</green> <blue>255</blue>

</panelcolor> </status1> <status2>

: (same as for the status1 tag) </status2> :

</colors> :

</status>

Page 329: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 309 -

• backcolor This item allows you to specify the background color of an entire

row. • forecolor This item allows you to specify the caption color of an item. • panelcolor This item allows you to specify the background color of an item.

Page 330: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 310 -

3.6.4.2 Specifying status bar display item colors The emgcy, alarm, batlow, and warning tags can be used to specify the colors of each status bar display item. The colors of each of the following items can be specified. • Emergency stop status • Alarm status • Low battery voltage • Warning

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <colors>

: <emgcy>

<forecolor> <red>255</red> <green>255</green> <blue>255</blue>

</forecolor> <backcolor>

<red>255</red> <green>64</green> <blue>64</blue>

</backcolor> </emgcy> <alarm>

: (Same as for the emgcy tag) </alarm> <batlow>

: (Same as for the emgcy tag) </batlow> <warning>

: (Same as for the emgcy tag) </warning> :

</colors> :

</status>

Page 331: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 311 -

Display item Tag Emergency stop status emgcy

Alarm status alarm Low battery voltage batlow

Warning warning

• forecolor This item allows you to specify the caption color of a display

item. • backcolor This item allows you to specify the background color of a display

item.

Page 332: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 312 -

3.7 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE DISPLAY AREA Basic Operation Package 2 allows the colors of its message display area to be customized using the color tag in the status.xml file (see Section 3.2, “CUSTOMIZATION FILES”).

↑Alarm message display

↑Operator message display

NOTE 1 Be extremely careful when editing definition files.

It is recommended that before changing definition files, you make a backup copy of them.

2 Use the Unicode in editing definition files.

Page 333: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 313 -

3.7.1 Specifying Message Display Area Colors The cncmessage tag can be used to specify the colors of the message display area. The following colors can be specified. • Background color of the message display area • Color of alarm message text • Color of operator message text

• backcolor This item allows you to specify the message display area

background color. • alarm This item allows you to specify the alarm message text color. • operate This item allows you to specify the operator message text color.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <colors>

: <cncmessage>

<backcolor> <red>192</red> <green>192</green> <blue>192</blue>

</backcolor> <alarm>

<red>255</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</alarm> <operate>

<red>255</red> <green>255</green> <blue>128</blue>

</operate> </cncmessage> :

</colors> :

</status>

Page 334: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 314 -

3.8 CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY AREA The PMC status display area of Basic Operation Package 2 is displayed on child screens related to the PMC. The package allows the colors of the PMC status display area to be customized using the color tag in the status.xml file (see Section 3.2, “CUSTOMIZATION FILES”).

NOTE 1 Be extremely careful when editing definition files.

It is recommended that before changing definition files, you make a backup copy of them.

2 Use the Unicode in editing definition files.

Page 335: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 315 -

3.8.1 PMC Status Area Displays Explained below are the items displayed in the PMC status display area. The PMC status area is displayed on child screens related to the PMC. (It is positioned on the top left section by default.)

• Items displayed in the PMC status area

Number shown above

Item

① PMC program execution status ② PMC alarm occurrence status ③ Selected PMC system number

Page 336: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 316 -

3.8.2 Specifying PMC Status Area Colors The pmc tag can be used to specify the background color of the PMC status area and the caption and background colors of each display item. The following colors can be specified. • PMC status area background color • Caption and background colors of each display item • Caption and background colors used during PMC execution • Character and background colors of PMC alarm messages The colors of each display item and the background color of the PMC status area can be specified using the following items.

• forecolor This item allows you to specify the caption color of displays.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?> <status>

: <colors>

: <pmc>

<forecolor> <red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</forecolor> <backcolor>

<red>255</red> <green>255</green> <blue>255</blue>

</backcolor> <panelbackcolor>

<red>192</red> <green>192</green> <blue>192</blue>

</panelbackcolor> :

</pmc> :

</colors> :

</status>

Page 337: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 317 -

• backcolor This item allows you to specify the basic background color of

display items. • panelcolor This item allows you to specify the background color of the PMC

status area. The colors used during PMC program execution can be specified using the following items. P

• prgforecolor This item allows you to specify the caption color used during

PMC execution. • prgbackcolor This item allows you to specify the background color used

during PMC execution.

: <pmc>

: <prgforecolor>

<red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</prgforecolor> <prgbackcolor>

<red>255</red> <green>0</green> <blue>255</blue>

</prgbackcolor> :

</pmc> :

Page 338: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 318 -

The following items can be used to specify the colors for PMC alarm messages.

• almforecolor This item allows you to specify the color of PMC alarm message

text. • almbackcolor This item allows you to specify the background color of PMC

alarm messages.

: <pmc>

: <almforecolor>

<red>0</red> <green>0</green> <blue>0</blue>

</almforecolor> <almbackcolor >

<red>255</red> <green>0</green> <blue>255</blue>

</almbackcolor > :

</pmc> :

Page 339: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 319 -

3.9 CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION This section explains how to customize DNC operation. The priority of transfer threads in DNC operation can be adjusted to the environment of your PC. Procedure 1 If the [DNC detail setting] screen is currently not displayed,

display the [DNC detail setting] screen as described in Subsection 2.7.2.1, "Setting a CNC to be connected".

Page 340: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

3.CUSTOMIZATION B-63924EN/01

- 320 -

Explanation The following items can be customized. • Priority NC programs for DNC operation are transferred, using Windows

subthreads. This item allows you to specify the priority of a Windows thread, using a round-robin scheduling method.

The lower the priority is, the shorter execution time is allowed for transfer threads; however, the response of the user interface will not be impaired. To the contrary, the higher the priority is, the longer execution time is allowed for transfer threads; however, the response of the user interface becomes lower.

• Interval for DNC start This item allows you to specify the interval at which checks are

made for DNC operation requests issued from the CNC to the PC. The thread is kept sleeping for the time (in ms units) specified with this item since a check made for a DNC operation request. After the specified interval elapses, the thread checks for another DNC operation request.

The smaller this interval is, the higher is the response to a DNC operation request from the CNC; however, the response of the user interface becomes lower.

• Interval for DNC This item allows you to specify the interval at which NC

programs are transferred. The thread is kept sleeping for the time (in ms units) specified with this item after the operation buffer becomes full with received NC programs. After the specified interval elapses, the thread starts transferring NC programs.

The smaller this interval is, the higher is the NC program transfer speed (depending on what NC program is transferred, though); however, the response of the user interface becomes lower.

• Ignore M02, M30 and % Some CAD systems create NC programs that are suffixed

automatically with M02, M30, or %. This function enables scheduled operation to be performed without modifying such NC programs.

Turning on the check box of this item causes M02, M30, and % in NC programs to be converted to spaces during scheduled operation before the programs are transferred to the CNC. After the end of the last program transfer in the schedule, the last M code that was converted to a space is transferred. The range of programs subjected to conversion to spaces is specified using “Character count from top of file to stop check” and “Character count from end of file to start check”, both of which are explained later.

This setting does not affect subprogram call operation. Character count from top of file to stop check

Page 341: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 3.CUSTOMIZATION

- 321 -

This item allows you to specify how many characters are to be subjected to conversion from M02, M30, and % to spaces, using the number of characters counted from the beginning of the program if “Ignore M02, M30 and %” is enabled.

This is intended to prevent % at the beginning of the program from being sent.

This setting does not affect subprogram call operation. • Character count from end of file to start check This item allows you to specify how many characters are to be

subjected to conversion from M02, M30, and % to spaces, using the number of characters counted from the end of the program if “Ignore M02, M30 and %” is enabled.

This is intended to prevent auxiliary function codes and % at the end of the program from being sent.

This setting does not affect subprogram call operation. • Notify DNC reset/stop request If the CNC issues a reset/stop request during DNC operation, the

following message appears:

• Output DNC operation log files Turning on the check box of this item causes the status of DNC

operation to be written to a file during scheduled or subprogram call operation. Using this function lowers the performance of DNC operation.

The log file is directed to the dnclog subfolder in the folder where Basic Operation Package 2 is installed.

Page 342: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)
Page 343: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

APPENDIX

Page 344: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)
Page 345: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 325 -

A SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS This appendix explains the settings (options, parameters, and modes) on the CNC side for the screens of Basic Operation Package 2.

Page 346: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 326 -

1. [Overall Position] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic)

Settings requiredfor screen displaymodification and operation

Axis name Parameter No. 1020, 1025, 1026 = 48 to 57 0 to 9 = 65 to 90 A to Z Whether axes are displayed or not Bit 0 of parameter No. 3115 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Inch/metric switching (relative position, absolute position, distance to go) When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Inch/metric switching (machine position) When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 1 of parameter No. 1001 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Whether axis data is displayed in reverse video Bit 0 of parameter No. 0012 = 0 Not displayed in reverse video = 1 Displayed in reverse video Whether distance to go is displayed or not MDI, EDIT, REMOTE mode Displayed Other modes Not displayed Display of the [Set Float Point] operation key When the "floating reference position return" option is specifiedand an absolute position or relative position is displayed

Display of the [Preset Work Coord.] operation key When the “workpiece coordinate system preset" option is specifiedand an absolute position or relative position is displayed

Operation error protection function "axis state display" Bit 6 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Absolute coordinate value preset operation When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level

2. [Modal] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings requiredfor screen displaymodification and operation

Operation error protection function "updated modal informationdisplay" Bit 4 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Highlighted = 1 Not highlighted

3. [Actual Speed] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings requiredfor screen displaymodification and operation

Inch/metric switching When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch

Page 347: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 327 -

4. [Program Check] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

5. [Block] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Inch/metric switching When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch

6. [Program Edit] screen (directory mode)

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of machining time (detail) in the directory When the "machining time stamp" option is specified Display of the [Protect Level] operation key When the “8-level data protection function" option is specified Release of program protection When the same nonzero value is set in parameter No. 3210 and parameter No. 3211 Cancellation of encoding When the same value is set in parameter No. 3220 and parameter No. 3221 Setting for disabling display When program protection is released Setting for encoding When encoding is released Use of the [Edit Start] operation key - When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the output protect level - Release of the memory protection key

7. [Program Edit] screen (edit mode)

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Teach in] operation key When the "Playback" option is specified and the mode of the CNCis Teach in Handle or Teach in JOG.

Display of the [Insert Time] operation key When the "machining time stamp function" option is specified

Page 348: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 328 -

8. [MDI Program] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Use of the [Send] operation key When the operation is stopped or paused in the MDI mode

9. [DNC Operation Monitor] screen, [DNC Schedule Setting] screen, [DNC Sub

Program Call Setting] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of DNC-related screens When the [DNC] check box is checked in the connection setting of Basic Operation Package 2

10. [Setting (Handy)] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Input unit] field When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Type of [Input unit] Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Display of the [Tape Format] field When the "F15 tape format" option is specified Type of [Tape Format] Bit 1 of parameter No. 0001 = 0 No conversion (FS16 standard

format) = 1 Conversion to the FS15 format Modification to settings When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operationlevel is not lower than the change protect level Operation error protection function "setting check" Bit 3 of parameter No. 3191 = 0 Not displayed = 1 Displayed

11. [Setting (Timer)] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Modification to time data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operationlevel is not lower than the change protect level Operation error protection function "setting check" Bit 3 of parameter No. 3191 = 0 Not displayed = 1 Displayed

Page 349: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 329 -

12. [Tool Offset] screen CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Axis name See the [Overall Position] screen. Inch/metric switching When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Display of the [Clear] operation key Bit 4 of parameter No. 3205 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Modification to tool offset data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level Display of memory type A (M series) Basic function Display of memory type B (M series) When the "tool compensation memory B" option is specified Display of memory type C (M series) When the "tool compensation memory C" option is specified Display of virtual tool tip direction (M series) When the "cutter/tool-nose radius compensation" option is specifiedBit 5 of parameter No. 5009 = 1 TIP Display of 32 tool offsets (M series) Basic function Display of 64 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 64" option is specified Display of 99 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 99" option is specified Display of 200 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 200" option is specified Display of 400 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 400" option is specified Display of 499 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 499" option is specified Display of 999 tool offsets (M series) When the "tool offset count 999" option is specified Display of the [Length] and [Radius] operation keys (M series) When the "tool compensation memory C" option is specified

Page 350: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 330 -

Display of memory type A (T series) Basic function Display of memory type B (T series) When the "tool geometry/wear compensation" option is specified Display of tool-nose radius compensation (T series) When the "tool-nose radius compensation" option is specified Display of the [Geometry] and [Wear] operation keys (T series) When the "tool geometry/wear compensation" option is specified Display of Y-axis offset (T series) When the "Y-axis offset" option is specified Display of 32 tool offsets (T series) Basic function Display of 32 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 32" option is specified Display of 64 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 64" option is specified Display of 99 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 99" option is specified Display of 200 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 200" option is specified Display of 400 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 400" option is specified Display of 499 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 499" option is specified Display of 999 tool offsets (T series) When the "tool offset count 999" option is specified Operation error protection function "incremental input recheck" Bit 0 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed

Page 351: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 331 -

Operation error protection function "display of a valid data range"When the following parameters are set: ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset not used, X-axis offset ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, X-axis and geometry offsets・M series, tool offset memory A offset ・M series, tool offset memory B and geometry offsets ・M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and length offsets Parameter Nos. 10000 to 10019 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10020 to 10039 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset not used, Z-axis offset ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, Z-axis and geometry offsets・M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and radius offsets Parameter Nos. 10040 to 10059 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10060 to 10079 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset not used, tool-nose radius offset・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, tool-nose radius and geometry offsets Parameter Nos. 10080 to 10099 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10100 to 10119 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, X-axis and wear offsets・M series, tool offset memory B and wear offsets ・M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and length offsets Parameter Nos. 10120 to 10139 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10140 to 10159 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, Z-axis and wear offsets・M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and radius offsets Parameter Nos. 10160 to 10179 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10180 to 10199 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, tool-noose radius and wear offsets Parameter Nos. 10200 to 10219 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10220 to 10239 Upper limits of the offsets above ・Range of tool offset numbers corresponding to parameters (10000to 10239) Parameter Nos. 10240 to 10259 Lower limits of tool offset numbersParameter Nos. 10260 to 10279 Upper limits of tool offset numbers ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset not used, Y-axis offset ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, Y-axis and geometry offsetsParameter Nos. 10280 to 10283 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10284 to 10287 Upper limits of the offsets above ・T series, tool geometry/wear offset used, Y-axis and wear offsetsParameter Nos. 10288 to 10291 Lower limits of the offsets aboveParameter Nos. 10292 to 10295 Upper limits of the offsets above ・Range of tool offset numbers corresponding to parameters (10000to 10239) Parameter Nos. 10296 to 10299 Lower limits of tool offset numbersParameter Nos. 10300 to 10303 Upper limits of tool offset numbers

Page 352: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 332 -

13. [Custom Macro] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function Custom macro Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of local variables 1 to 33, and common variables 100 to 149 and 500 to 549 Basic function Display of local variables 1 to 33, and common variables 100 to 199 and 500 to 999 When the "custom macro common variable addition" option is specified Switching of the valid number of digits Bit 0 of Parameter No. 6008 = 0 12 digits = 1 8 digits Operation error protection function "incremental input recheck" Bit 0 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Modification to custom macro variable data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level

Page 353: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 333 -

14. [Work Zero Offset] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function Workpiece coordinate system

When the "workpiece coordinate system" option is specified 0 to 6 When the "additional 48 workpiece coordinate systems" option is specified 0 to 6, P1 to P48 When the "additional 300 workpiece coordinate systems" option is specified 0 to 6, P1 to P300 Inch/metric switching When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Operation error protection function "incremental input recheck" Bit 0 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Operation error protection function "display of a valid data range"When the following parameters are set: Parameter Nos. 10304 to 10309 Lower limits of workpiece origin offsets Parameter Nos. 10310 to 10315 Upper limits of workpiece origin offsets - Range of workpiece origin offsets corresponding to parameters

(10304 to 10315) Parameter Nos. 10316 to 10321 Lower limits of ranges of workpiece

origin offsets (For an additional workpiece coordinate system, a value incremented

by 1000 is set.) Parameter Nos. 10322 to 10327 Upper limits of ranges of workpiece

origin offsets (For an additional workpiece coordinate system, a value incremented

by 1000 is set.) Parameter No. 10331 Lower limit of an external workpiece origin offsetParameter No. 10332 Upper limit of an external workpiece origin offset Modification to workpiece origin offset data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level The units of offset values are as follows:

1013#3(ISE)

1013#2(ISD)

1013#1(ISC)

1013#0(ISA)

Linear axis Metric input [M series]

Linear axis Inch input [inch]

Rotation axis [deg]

(IS-A) 0 0 0 1 0.01 0.001 0.01 (IS-B) 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.0001 0.001 (IS-C) 0 0 1 0 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001 (IS-D) 0 1 0 0 0.00001 0.000001 0.00001

(IS-E) 1 0 0 0 0.000001 0.0000001 0.000001

Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Page 354: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 334 -

15. [Work Shift] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic)

Whether the [Work Shift] screen (lathe system) is to be displayed Bit 6 of parameter No. 1201 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Axis name See the [Overall Position] screen. Modification to the order of axis names Parameter No. 3134 Inch/metric switching When the "inch/metric switching" option is specified Bit 2 of parameter No. 0000 = 0 Metric = 1 Inch Operation error protection function "incremental input recheck" Bit 0 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Operation error protection function "display of a valid data range"When the following parameters are set: Parameter No. 10328 Lower limit of a workpiece coordinate systemshift value Parameter No. 10329 Upper limit of a workpiece coordinate systemshift value Modification to workpiece coordinate system shift data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level The units of shift values are as follows:

1013#3(ISE)

1013#2(ISD)

1013#1(ISC)

1013#0(ISA)

Linear axisMetric input [mm]

Linear axis Inch input [inch]

Rotation axis [deg]

(IS-A) 0 0 0 1 0.01 0.001 0.01 (IS-B) 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.0001 0.001 (IS-C) 0 0 1 0 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001 (IS-D) 0 1 0 0 0.00001 0.000001 0.00001

(IS-E) 1 0 0 0 0.000001 0.0000001 0.000001

Settings required for screen display modification and operation

16. [Parameter] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Modification to parameter data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level

17. [Diagnosis] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

Page 355: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 335 -

18. [System Configuration] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

19. [Data I/O] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Output of program data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the output protect level Output of parameter data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the output protect level Output of pitch error compensation data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the output protect level Output of custom macro variable data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level

20. [Pitch] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function Stored pitch error compensation Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Operation error protection function "incremental input recheck" Bit 0 of parameter No. 10330 = 0 Displayed = 1 Not displayed Modification to pitch error compensation data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level

21. [PMC Status] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Switch PMC] operation key When multiple PMC paths are used

Page 356: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 336 -

22. [PMC Alarm] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

23. [PMC Counter] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Switch PMC] operation key When multiple PMC paths are used Display of PMC counter data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled Displayed unconditionally → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter reference is disabled (K902.6 = 0) Editing of PMC counter data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled When the operation level is not lower than the change protect level→ When the 8-level data protection function is disabled - MDI mode - When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter modification is disabled (K902.7 = 0)

24. [PMC Timer] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Switch PMC] operation key When multiple PMC paths are used Display of PMC timer data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled Displayed unconditionally → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter reference is disabled (K902.6 = 0) Editing of PMC counter data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled When the operation level is not lower than the change protect level→ When the 8-level data protection function is disabled - MDI mode - When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter modification is disabled (K902.7 = 0)

Page 357: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 337 -

25. [PMC Keep Relay] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Switch PMC] operation key When multiple PMC paths are used Display of PMC keep relay data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled Displayed unconditionally → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter reference is disabled (K902.6 = 0) Editing of PMC keep relay data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled When the operation level is not lower than the keep relay change protect level → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled - MDI mode - When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter modification is disabled (K902.7 = 0) Display of PMC keep relay system data (K900 and up) → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled Displayed unconditionally → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter reference is disabled (K902.6 = 0) Editing of PMC keep relay system data (K900 and up) → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled When the operation level is not lower than the keep relay (system) change protect level → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled - MDI mode - When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter modification is disabled (K902.7 = 0) and editing

is enabled (K901.6 = 1)

26. [PMC Data] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Switch PMC] operation key When multiple PMC paths are used Editing of the table data of PMC data When the 8-level data protection function is disabled, or When the 8-level data protection function is enabled and the operation level is not lower than the change protect level Display of PMC data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled Displayed unconditionally → When the 8-level data protection function is disabled When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter reference is disabled (K902.6 = 0) Editing of PMC data → When the 8-level data protection function is enabled When the operation level is not lower than the change protect level→ When the 8-level data protection function is disabled - MDI mode - When the programmer function is enabled (K900.1 = 1), or When PMC parameter modification is disabled (K902.7 = 0)

Page 358: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 338 -

27. [Alarm Message] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

28. [Operator Message] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function External message

External data input Custom macro

Settings required for screen display modification and operation

The [External Operator Message] screen displays: Bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 = 0 Up to one message not longer than

256 characters = 1 Up to four messages each not longer

than 64 characters

29. [Alarm History] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

Display of the [Clear] operation key Bit 7 of parameter No. 3195 = 0 Not displayed = 1 Displayed

30. [Setup] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

31. [Language Select Setting] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

32. [Folder Select Setting] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

Page 359: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX A.SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS

- 339 -

33. [About Basic Operation Package 2] screen

CNC supported FS30i/31i/32i Optional function None (basic) Settings required for screen display modification and operation

None

Page 360: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 340 -

B CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

This appendix explains the method of modifying message character strings displayed on the screens of Basic Operation Package 2. With Basic Operation Package 2, display messages are stored in a file called a resource DLL (dynamic link library) in binary format. The actual file name is Bop2.resources.dll. The resource DLL is a file required for each display language (culture). By modifying an existing resource DLL, the display messages can be modified. Moreover, a resource DLL can be created for a new display language.

CAUTION When creating a resource DLL, observe the

following rules: • Copy the FANUC_VGA folder or FANUC_XGA

folder held in the Definition folder to within the same Definition folder then assign an arbitrary folder name to the folder produced by copy operation. Edit message files in this folder.

• When using Basic Operation Package 2, select a folder copied on the [Folder Select Setting] screen.

If the above rules are not observed, an abnormal operation can occur, or at the time of reinstallation of Basic Operation Package 2, the results of editing performed so far can be lost.

Page 361: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 341 -

The flow of resource DLL creation is described below. For resource DLL creation, edit message files and a resource creation batch file with the text editor, then execute the batch file. For details of the files, see the next page.

Message file (m_xxx.xx.txt)

ResGen.exe (Resource generator)

Intermediate resource file

(m_xxx.xx.res)

Intermediate resource file

(m_xxx.xx.res)

Intermediate resource file

(m_xxx.xx.res)

al.exe (Application linker)

Resource DLL

(Bop2.resources.dll)

Message file (m_xxx.xx.txt)

Message file (m_xxx.xx.txt)

(Resource creation batch file)

msg_en.bat: English msg_jp.bat: Japanese

Edit

Create

Create

Page 362: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 342 -

B.1 FILES RELATED TO A RESOURCE DLL Files used to create a resource DLL are stored in the following: Basic-Operation-Package-2-installation-folder\Definition\

Screen-definition-file-folder\msg\

<Within each culture-name-folder\txt folder>

*.txt : Message file

A message file is a text file where a message ID and message character string (in each language) are registered. For details, see Section B.2, "MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE", and Section B.3, "MESSAGE FILE FORMAT".

msg_*.bat : Resource creation batch file

By executing this file, a resource file is created from each message file then a resource DLL is created. In the position of *, a culture name described later is entered.

Page 363: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 343 -

<Within the tool folder> ResGen.exe : Resource generator

Tool for creating a resource file in binary format from a message file in text format

*.resouces : Resource file Intermediate file in binary format generated when a resource DLL is created

al.exe, alink.dll, alinkui.dll : Assembly generation tools Tools for creating a resource DLL from resource files

NOTE The tool folder stores EXE and DLL files for

creating a resource DLL. Do not modify or delete these files.

Page 364: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 344 -

B.2 MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE A message file is named according to the following rule: resource-name.culture-name.txt Example: m_main.en.txt, m_ofs.ja.txt The table below indicates the resource names (identifiers for representing screens and functions).

Resource name Related data Required for English only

diag15 Comment on diagnostic data (FS15) ○ diag15i Comment on diagnostic data

(FS15i) ○

diag16 Comment on diagnostic data (FS16/18/21/16i/18i/21i)

diag30 Comment on diagnostic data (FS30i/31i/32i)

-

m_8lvl 8-level data protection function - m_about Version information - m_alm Alarm screen

Alarm History screen -

m_block Program block screen - m_chkio Input/output error - m_cncerr NC error - m_dataio Data I/O screen - m_diag Diagnosis screen - m_dncmoni DNC Operation Monitor screen - m_dncoperation DNC function outline - m_dncsch DNC Schedule Setting screen - m_dncsub DNC Sub Program Call Setting

screen -

m_main Basic Operation Package 2 outline - m_mcr Custom Macro screen - m_ofs Tool Offset screen - m_opcon Operation error protection function - m_opems Operation Message screen - m_param Parameter screen - m_pedt Program Edit screen

Program Check screen MDI program edit screen

-

m_pitch Pitch screen - m_pmc_alarm PMC Alarm screen - m_pmc_counter PMC Counter screen - m_pmc_data PMC Data screen - m_pmc_keeprelay PMC Keep Relay screen - m_pmc_status PMC Status screen - m_pmc_timer PMC Timer screen -

Page 365: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 345 -

Resource name Related data Required for English only

m_pos Position display screen - m_realspeed Actual Speed screen - m_setting Setting (Handy) screen - m_systco System Configuration screen - m_timer Setting (Timer) screen - m_wof Work Zero Offset screen - m_wsh Work Shift screen - param15m Comment on parameter data

(FS15/15i-M) ○

param15t Comment on parameter data (FS15/15i-T)

param16m Comment on parameter data (FS16/18/16i/18i-M)

param16t Comment on parameter data (FS16/18/16i/18i-T)

param21m Comment on parameter data (FS21/21i-M)

param21t Comment on parameter data (FS21/21i-T)

param30m Comment on parameter data (FS30i/31i/32i-M)

-

param30t Comment on parameter data (FS30i/31i/32i -T) -

status Status bar ○ syst_0i Comment on system configuration

data (FS0i)

syst_15i Comment on system configuration data

(FS15i) ○

syst_30i Comment on system configuration data

(FS30i/31i/32i) ○

syst_i Comment on system configuration data

(FS16i/18i/21i) ○

Page 366: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 346 -

A culture name (identifier for representing each language) is a two-digit lowercase code based on ISO 639-1. See the table below.

Language Culture name Japanese ja English en German de French fr Italian It Spanish es Portuguese pt Czech cs

NOTE The files including resource names for which

"Required for English only" is indicated need not be edited with a culture other than English.

Page 367: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 347 -

B.3 MESSAGE FILE FORMAT The format of a message file is as follows: ; [Keycontrol Definition] (1) MSG_KEY_POS=Position indication (2) MSG_KEY_PROG=Program MSG_KEY_SETTING=Setting MSG_KEY_SYSTEM=System MSG_KEY_MESSAGE=Message : (1) Comment

When a semicolon (;) is prefixed to a line, the line is recognized not as a message but as a comment.

(2) Message ID and message character string The left side of an equal sign (=) represents a message ID, and the right side represents message text. Describe a message in the language corresponding to the culture name of a file. Assign a message ID that is unique in the file. Use a currently set message ID, regardless of the culture.

The following restrictions are imposed: • A message file needs to be stored in Unicode format. • A space can be used in a message character string. • A tab in a character string is ignored. • Up to 512 characters can be specified on one line. • Code \\ to specify \, and code \n to specify a line feed operation. Example: \10,000 → \\10,000

Page 368: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 348 -

B.4 CREATING A RESOURCE DLL Create a resource DLL according to the procedure described below. A resource DLL needs to be created for each display language (culture). When creating a resource DLL for a new culture, start with step 1. In other cases, start with step 6.

CAUTION When creating a resource DLL, observe the

following rules: • Copy the FANUC_VGA folder or FANUC_XGA

folder held in the Definition folder to within the same Definition folder then assign an arbitrary folder name to the folder produced by copy operation. Edit message files in this folder.

• When using Basic Operation Package 2, select a folder copied on the [Folder Select Setting] screen.

If the above rules are not observed, an abnormal operation can occur, or at the time of reinstallation of Basic Operation Package 2, the results of editing performed so far can be lost.

Procedure 1 The Definition folder is included in the folder where Basic

Operation Package 2 is installed. From the Definition folder, select a screen definition folder for which a resource DLL is to be created, then reference the msg folder under the folder.

2 Edit the language.xml file in the msg folder with the text editor.

(When using Explorer, right-click language.xml then choose [Edit]. The editor is started to enable editing.)

Add a culture tag to the language.xml file. Specify a culture name as the value of the tag. As the name attribute, specify an arbitrary character string to be displayed on

Page 369: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 349 -

the screen where the display language for Basic Operation Package 2 is switched. In the example below, Spanish is added.

<languages> <culture name="English">en</culture> <culture name="Japanese">ja</culture> <culture name="Spanish">es</culture> </languages>

3 Save the language.xml file in Unicode format then quit editing. 4 If there is no folder for a culture to be created, copy the en folder

in the msg folder then rename the folder produced by copy operation. For a new folder name to be assigned, see the description of the culture names in Section B.2, "MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE".

5 Open the txt folder in the folder created in step 4. Then, change all culture name occurrences in the message files and resource creation batch file to a desired culture name.

Steps 6 and 7 below explain how to edit a message file. Proceed to step 8 when not editing a message file.

6 From the Definition folder held in the Basic Operation Package 2

installation folder, select a folder including a screen definition file to be edited. From the msg folder in the selected folder, select the txt folder. From this txt folder, select a screen or function message file to be edited. For this selection, see Section B.2, "MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE".

7 Edit the message file (txt file) with the text editor.

(When using Explorer, first select the text file. Next, right-click then choose [Edit], or double-click. The editor is started to enable editing.)

Page 370: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES APPENDIX B-63924EN/01

- 350 -

For editing, see Section B.3, "MESSAGE FILE FORMAT". Upon completion of editing, save the file.

8 Edit the resource creation batch file (msg_"culture-name".bat) with the text editor. This file is stored in the same folder that stores the message files.

Modify the locations indicated below in the batch file then save the file. Do not modify any other locations other than those indicated below.

@ SET LANG=es : Culture

@ SET COMPANY="FANUC LTD" : Company name

@ SET COPYRIGHT_ADD= : Character string to be added after "Copyright (C) 2002-2004, FANUC LTD"

@ SET DESCRIPTION="FANUC BOP2" : Comment

@ SET FILEVERSION_ADD=1 : Rightmost number of product version data

@ SET TRADEMARK="FANUC BOP2" : Trademark

@ SET TITLE="Spanish Resources for FANUC BOP2" : Explanation

9 Double-click the resource creation batch file to execute the file.

NOTE Use Unicode as the character code.

Page 371: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 APPENDIX B.CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES

- 351 -

10 Upon completion of execution, a resource DLL (Bop2.resources.dll) is generated in the folder that is located immediately under the msg folder and has the culture name. To use this resource DLL, reference folder selection and language switching are required with Basic Operation Package 2. See Subsection 2.7.4, "Selecting the Reference Folder of a Screen Definition File", and Subsection 2.7.3, "Switching Display Language".

Page 372: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)
Page 373: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 INDEX

i-1

INDEX <A>

Actual Speed screen-specific definitions.......................264

Alarm History screen-specific definitions.....................302

Alarm Message screen-specific definitions...................300

<B> BASIC CUSTOMIZATION .........................................219

<C> Changing the number of groups of PMC data ...............185

Changing the user level and password ..........................206

Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed ....50

Child Screen Definitions ...............................................258

Clearing all custom macro variables to zero .................134

Clearing all tool offset data to zero ...............................127

colors Definition ...........................................................239

Common Definition Part ...............................................243

Condensing an NC program............................................69

CONFIGURATION......................................................201

Configuration of the Standard Screen .............................16

confs Definition.............................................................226

controlbase definitions ..................................................254

Copying an NC program .................................................61

Copying character strings from an MDI program ...........94

Copying character strings from an NC program .............88

Creating a folder on the CNC..........................................70

CREATING A RESOURCE DLL ................................348

Creating a schedule file .................................................101

Creating an NC program .................................................58

CREATING MESSAGE LANGUAGE FILES.............340

Custom Macro screen-specific definitions ....................279

CUSTOMIZATION......................................................213

CUSTOMIZATION FILES ..........................................215

CUSTOMIZING CHILD SCREENS............................240

CUSTOMIZING DNC OPERATION...........................319

CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE DISPLAY AREA..312

CUSTOMIZING THE PMC STATUS DISPLAY

AREA .....................................................................314

CUSTOMIZING THE STATUS BAR..........................303

Cutting character strings from an MDI program .............94

Cutting character strings from an NC program ...............87

<D> Data I/O screen-specific definitions ..............................290

data_series definitions ...................................................252

Definition Data..............................................................242

Definition Files and XML Schemas ..............................241

Deleting a folder from the CNC ......................................72

Deleting an NC program .................................................59

Deleting the entire alarm message history.....................199

Deleting various types of data files ...............................161

Diagnosis screen-specific definitions ............................287

Display Definition Part..................................................246

Display of Messages from Connected CNCs ..................33

Display position screen-specific definitions..................259

Displaying a data table by specifying a PMC data

group number ..........................................................193

Displaying a data table of PMC data.............................190

Displaying a list of various types of data files ..............155

Displaying a PMC Keep Relay .....................................179

Displaying Alarm Messages..........................................196

Displaying Operator Messages......................................197

Displaying Parameters...................................................143

Displaying PMC Alarms ...............................................171

Displaying PMC data in decimal or hexadecimal .........195

Displaying PMC keep relay data in decimal or

hexadecimal ............................................................181

Displaying PMC Status .................................................167

Displaying PMC status data in decimal or

hexadecimal ............................................................169

Displaying the Absolute Position ....................................38

Displaying the Alarm Message History ........................198

Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of the NC

Program Being Executed...........................................53

Displaying the Diagnosis Screen...................................148

Displaying the Distance to Go.........................................49

Displaying the Machine Position ....................................48

Displaying the NC Program Directory ............................54

Displaying the Relative Position .....................................39

Displaying the System Configuration ...........................150

Displaying the top/end of an MDI program ....................93

Displaying the top/end of an NC program.......................84

Displaying Version Information....................................212

DNC Operation Monitor screen-specific definitions.....271

Page 374: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

INDEX B-63924EN/01

i-2

DNC Schedule Operation................................................97

DNC Schedule Setting screen-specific definitions........272

DNC Sub Program Call Setting screen-specific

definitions ...............................................................273

DNC Subprogram Call Operation .................................106

<E> Editing an MDI Program.................................................90

Editing an NC Program...................................................75

Enabling parameter write ..............................................147

Entering a coordinate value into an NC program............85

Entering a counter value for a custom macro variable ..133

Entering a counter value for tool offset data .................125

Entering a measured value for tool offset data ..............126

Entering a measured value for workpiece origin offset

data..........................................................................138

Entering an increment for a custom macro variable......132

Entering an increment for pitch error compensation

data..........................................................................166

Entering an increment for tool offset data.....................124

Entering an increment for workpiece coordinate

system shift data......................................................142

Entering an increment for workpiece origin offset data 139

Entering various types of data.......................................156

Executing a schedule operation.......................................98

Executing a subprogram call operation .........................107

<F> FILES RELATED TO A RESOURCE DLL ................342

Finding a character string in a NC program ....................82

Finding a character string in an MDI program................91

Finding a custom macro variable number .....................131

Finding a diagnostic data number .................................149

Finding a group number of PMC data...........................187

Finding a parameter number .........................................145

Finding a pitch error compensation data number ..........165

Finding a PMC counter number ....................................173

Finding a PMC data address..........................................193

Finding a PMC keep relay address................................180

Finding a PMC status address .......................................168

Finding a PMC timer number........................................177

Finding a tool offset data number..................................123

Finding a workpiece origin offset data number.............137

font definitions ..............................................................256

funcs Definition.............................................................227

<H> Handy screen-specific definitions .................................274

<I> image definitions...........................................................249

Initializing the table control data of PMC data..............188

Inputting/Outputting Data .............................................152

Inserting an NC program from a disk..............................78

Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program .........96

Inserting sequence numbers into an NC program............80

INSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2.........3

<K> Key Controls and Screen Transition................................19

<L> label definitions.............................................................247

<M> Making a custom macro variable empty .......................134

MDI program edit screen-specific definitions...............270

MESSAGE FILE FORMAT .........................................347

MESSAGE FILE NAMING RULE ..............................344

MESSAGES..................................................................196

Modal Screen-Specific Definitions ...............................263

Monitoring the Execution Progress of DNC Operation.111

Monitoring the Power State of Connected CNCs............35

Moving an NC program ..................................................63

<N> Navigation Definition File Configuration .....................225

NC PROGRAM...............................................................50

NC program for schedule operation ................................99

NC program for subprogram call operation...................108

<O> Opening an existing schedule file .................................104

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ......................................2

OPERATION-RELATED CUSTOMIZATION ...........224

Operator Message screen-specific definitions ...............301

Outputting system configuration data to a file ..............151

Outputting various types of data ...................................159

Overall Position Display .................................................37

OVERVIEW OF CUSTOMIZATION..........................214

<P> Parameter screen-specific definitions............................285

Pasting character strings to an MDI program..................95

Page 375: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

B-63924EN/01 INDEX

i-3

Pasting character strings to an NC program ....................89

Pitch screen-specific definitions....................................291

PMC Alarm screen-specific definitions ........................293

PMC Counter screen-specific definitions......................294

PMC Data screen-specific definitions ...........................297

PMC Keep Relay screen-specific definitions................296

PMC Status Area Displays............................................315

PMC Status screen-specific definitions.........................292

PMC Timer screen-specific definitions.........................295

pmcchk definitions ........................................................250

POSITION DISPLAY.....................................................37

PREFACE ......................................................................p-1

Presetting relative coordinates ........................................42

Presetting the workpiece coordinate system....................46

PROCEDURE AT INITIAL STARTUP.........................12

Program block screen-specific definitions ....................267

Program Check screen-specific definitions ...................266

Program Edit screen-specific definitions.......................269

<R> Renaming a folder on the CNC .......................................73

Renaming an NC program...............................................60

Renaming various data files ..........................................163

Replacing a character string in an MDI program ............92

Replacing a character string in an NC program ..............83

Resetting relative coordinates .........................................40

<S> SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................ s-1

Saving a schedule file under an alias.............................105

SCREEN LAYOUT AND COMMON ITEMS...............16

SCREEN-SPECIFIC CNC SETTINGS ........................ 325

scrns Definition .............................................................236

Searching for a sequence number....................................52

Searching for an NC program .........................................51

Selecting an NC program to be executed ........................57

Selecting Status Display Items......................................306

Selecting the Reference Folder of a Screen Definition

File ..........................................................................211

Sending an MDI program to the CNC.............................93

SETTING......................................................................114

Setting a CNC to be connected .....................................204

Setting a Custom Macro Variable .................................128

Setting a PMC Counter .................................................172

Setting a PMC keep relay..............................................182

Setting a PMC Timer.....................................................175

Setting a schedule operation..........................................100

Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ..............140

Setting Basic Operation Package 2................................202

Setting data tables of PMC data ....................................194

Setting for each user level .............................................207

Setting of Settings .........................................................114

Setting Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer ..........117

Setting parameters .........................................................146

Setting parameters for input/output ...............................153

Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data.........................164

Setting PMC Data .........................................................184

Setting the attribute of a folder on the CNC....................74

Setting the attribute of an NC program ...........................65

SETTING THE CNC PARAMETERS ...........................13

Setting the machine position to the floating reference

position......................................................................44

Setting the protect level of an NC program.....................67

Setting the table control data of PMC data....................186

Setting Tool Offset ........................................................120

Setting Workpiece Origin Offset...................................135

SETUP ..............................................................................1

Specifying a folder storing subprograms.......................109

Specifying Message Display Area Colors .....................313

Specifying PMC Status Area Colors .............................316

Specifying status bar basic colors .................................308

Specifying Status Bar Colors ........................................307

Specifying status bar display item colors ......................310

Specifying the Size of Status Display Items..................305

Stamping the machining time..........................................86

STANDARD OPERATION............................................15

Status Bar Displays .......................................................304

Switching among PMC counter paths ...........................174

Switching among PMC data paths ................................189

Switching among PMC keep relay paths.......................183

Switching among PMC status paths ..............................170

Switching among PMC timer paths...............................178

Switching Display Language.........................................209

Switching the NC program directory display ..................55

Switching the type of custom macro variable ...............130

Switching the type of tool offset data............................122

SYSTEM.......................................................................143

System Configuration screen-specific definitions .........289

Page 376: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

INDEX B-63924EN/01

i-4

<T> text definitions...............................................................245

textstyles Definition ......................................................238

Timer screen-specific definitions ..................................275

Tool Offset screen-specific definitions .........................276

<U> UNINSTALLING BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2...9

User Level and Password ..............................................201

<W> Work Shift screen-specific definitions ..........................284

Work Zero Offset screen-specific definitions ...............283

Writing an NC program back to the CNC .......................77

Writing an NC program to a disk ....................................79

Page 377: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)

Rev

isio

n R

ecor

d

FAN

UC

OP

EN

CN

C B

asic

Ope

ratio

n P

acka

ge 2

OP

ER

ATO

R’S

MA

NU

AL

(B-6

3924

EN

)

01

A

ug.,

2004

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

Page 378: FANUC OPEN CNC - JAMET INC · FANUC Basic Operation Package 2 Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 README.TXT : Release Note (English version) READMEJ.TXT : Release Note (Japanese version)